Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (939.87 KB, 161 trang )
<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>
<b>Week: 1</b> <b> </b>
<b>Period: 1</b> <b> </b> <b> Preparing date : 12/8/2011</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>
Review main knowledge that Ss have studied in English 7
Introduce more effective methods of learning
<b>II. Teaching aids :</b>
- Text book , lesson plan, etc.
<b>III. The teaching procedures:</b>
1. Class organizing: - Greetings ( 1’)
- Checking attendance :(2’)
2. Revision:
<b>A.Revision: (32’)</b>
Grammatical tenses
<i><b>1. Present simple tense: </b></i>
- Structure :
- The usages:
<i><b>2. Present progressive tense :</b></i>
- Structure : S + tobe + V.ing
<i><b>* Forming V.ing: (listing)</b></i>
Ex: read – reading
prepare – preparing
run – running
lie - lying
- The usages:
<i><b>*Adv of time: now, at the moment,etc.</b></i>
<i><b>3. Past simple tense:</b></i>
- Structure: S + V.ed
<b>*Forming V.ed: Regular & Irregular</b>
Ex: Stay – Stayed
Study – Studied
live – lived
- The usages : (Adv of time)
<b>*Pronounce “V.ed” : </b>
/ id/ V ending in “ t,d”
/ t / V ending in “ p,k”
/ d/ the rest
4. Simple future tense:
- Structue: S + will + V(infi)
- The usages : (Adv of time)
<b>B. Introduction to E 8 : (10”)</b>
- T introduce E8 to Ss: Structures and contents
<b>- Week: 1</b>
<b>- Preparing date: 14/8/2011 </b>
<b> Lesson 1: - Getting started + Listen & Read</b>
<b>* Aim: - Reading the dialogue for details and revision of simple present and simple past</b>
tenses.
* Objective: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about
Hoa-Lan-Nien and to review simple present and simple past tense.
* Teaching aids: - Text book, cards.
* Procedure:
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b>(3’)
<b> Greeting and Checking attendance </b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (5’)</b> T asks ss to repeat some structures in last period
<b>3. NEW LESSON: </b>
<b>Content</b> <b>Teacher's activities Sts'</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Adding</b>
meet co
me
liv
e
think sen
d
thoug
ht
recei
ve
met liv
ed
receiv
ed
ca
me
sent
Look at the pictures (p.10) and
answer the questions.
b. Do you like soccer / reading books...?
c. Whom do you like playing with?
- a. playing football.
- b. studying together.
- c. pla ying chess.
- d. playing volleyball.
* Pre-reading: (15’)
1. Pre-teach vocabulary:
- to seem (translation): dường như
- a next door neighbor: hàng xãm
(explanation: a person who lives next to
your house).
- to look like (translation): giống như
* What + do/does + S + look like?: hình
dáng bên ngồi
* What + N! : cảm th¸n
* To be(not) + adj + enough + to do:
kh«ng đủ để hoặc đủ để làm g× đã
2. Pre-questions:
a. Is Nien Lan's friend or Hoa's friend?
b. How old is Nien?
- Guide Ss how to play the game.
- Matching words.
- Ask Ss to look at four pictures
on page 10 and talk about the
activities they want to do after
school or in their free time.
- Look at the pictures and talk
about the activities they do after
school or in their free time.
- Present new words on the
board.
- Guide Ss to read new words.
- Listen and repeat.
- Copy down.
- Read new words in chorus.
- Check Ss' memory by using
technique "Rub out and
remember".
c. Where does Nien live?
d. Is she a beautiful girl?
* While-reading: (10’)
Read the dialogue (p.10).
Read the dialogue again
Answer the questions in exercise 2
on page 11.
* Answers:
a. Nien lives in Hue.
b. No, she doesn't.
c. The sentence is "She wasn't old
enough to be in my class".
d. At Christmas.
* Post-reading: (3’)
Gap-filling: (live-sent-be-come)
"Hoa (1) in Hue last year, but now she
(2) in Hanoi. Yesterday, Hoa's friend
Nien (3) Hoa a letter. Nien (4)
Hoa's friend neighbor when Hoa lived in
Hue. She (5) yourger than Hoa. She
(6) to Hanoi in December.
* Homework: (2’)
Ask students to do exercise 1(a) ; 1(b)
(page 16) on their notebooks.
- Give feed back?
- Give Ss some questions and ask
them to answer them.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue.
- Read the questions and answer
them in pairs.
- Give feed back?
- Give the correct answers.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue
again and answer the questions.
- Read the dialogue again and
answer the question.
- Call on some students to ask
and answer the questions.
- Ask and answer the questions.
- Correct their mistakes or
pronunciation.
- Read the paragraph and fill in
the gaps with the suitable words
- Ask Ss to use the simple
present and simple past tense to
<b>- Week: 1 </b>
<b>- Period: 4</b>
<b>-Preparing date: 16/8/2011</b>
Lesson 2:
<b>* Aims: - Listening for details to complete the dialogue and speak to describe someone.</b>
* Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe someone and
complete the dialogue by listening.
* Teaching aids: - Text book.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ORDERS:</b> (3’)
<b> Greeting and Checking attendance </b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (10’)</b>
T: Asks Ss practice the dialogue in front of the class
<b>Ss: Practice and answer the questions</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>g</b>
* Warm-up: (Brainstorming).( 5’)
thin
curly
body build hair
* Presentation: ( 5”)
<b>Ex: - She has long blond </b>
hair.
- She is short and thin.
<b>----> Form:</b>
* Practice: (3’)
1. Word one drill:
a. He / tall / thin.
b. She / short / shin.
c. He / short / fat.
d. long / black.
e. curly / blond.
f. straight / brown.
2. Practice speaking: ( 5’)
* Example:
S1: This person is short and thin.
She has long blond hair.
S1: Yes.
* Pre-listening: (4’)
Present the expressions in
the box (p.12).
-Explain and read the expression
+ nice to/ gad to/ please to/ good
to/meet(see) you.
+ how do you do?
+ It’s a pleasure to meet you.
- cả ba cấu trúc trên đều có nghĩa
là “ rất vui/ nân hạnh được gặp
bạn”
+ I’d like to meet….. tôi muốn gặp
Gap fill prediction.
(Dialogues p.12-13)
Give feedback.
a/ I’d like you to meet/ nice to
meet you.
b/ I’d like you to meet/It’s a
- Ask Ss to think of the adjectives used
to describe body build and hair.
- Give the adjectives to describe body
build and hair.
- Show Ss a picture of Mary and ask
them to describe her hair, her body build.
- Describe Mary.
- Explain the structure.
- Listen and copy down.
- Supply the word cues and ask Ss to
complete the sentences.
- Complete the sentences based on cues.
- Ask Ss to look at six people on page
11-12-Call on a student to describe one
person, the others have to guess who
he/she is
- Look at six people and describe them
- Give Ss some expressions and make
sure they know their mean mgs.
- Listen and read the expressions.
- Get Ss to guess and to complete four
dialogues on page 12-13.
- Read the open dialogues (p.12-13) and
fill in the blanks with the suitable
expressions.
- Let students (to) listen to the tape
twice.
pleasure to meet.
c/ come and meet
d/ how do you do.
* While listening: ( 5’)
Listen to the tape twice.
Compare with their
prediction.
* Post-listening: (3’)
Practise the dialogues.
<b>* Homework: (2’)</b>
- Learn vocabulary, dialogue by
heart.
- Listen to the tape and then check their
prediction.
- Pratise the dialogues.
- Listen and correct their (prediction)
pronunciation.
- Listen and write
- Asks students listen and write
<b>- Week: 2</b> <b> </b>
<b>- Period: 5</b> <b> </b> <b> </b>
<b> -Preparing date: 20/8/2011</b>
Lesson 3<b> : </b>
* Objective: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about Ba's
friend.
* Teaching aids: - Text books.
* Procedure:
<b> 1.CLASS ODER:</b> (3’)
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to talk abuot the dialogue in front of the class
<b>Ss: Practice and answer the questions</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>Teacher's activities & Sts' activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
* Warm-up: (Chatting). (5’)
Look at the pictures (p.10)
and answer the questions.
a. What are these students doing?
b. Do you like soccer / reading
books...?
c. Whom do you like playing
with?
* Pre-reading: ( 15’)
Pre-teach vocabulary:
- character (translation): đặc
điểm
- an orphanage: a place where
children without parents live: trại
mồ côi
- Ask Ss to look at four pictures on page
10 and talk about the activities they want
to do after school or in their free time.
- Present and give the meaning of new
words.
- Listen and repeat.
- Copy down.
- reserved (adj): dè dặt
- sociable translation: gần
gủi
- (to) tell jokes: tell a story which
makes people laugh: truyện ngụ
ngôn
- sense of humor (translation):hài
- outgoing: cởi mở, thân thiện
T / F statements
prediction:
a. Ba only has three friends -
Bao, Song, Khai.
b. Ba and his friends have the
same characters.
c. Bao-Song-Khai are quite
reserved in public.
d. They all enjoy school and
study hard.
Give feedback:
* While reading: (7’)
Read the text (p.13).
Check their prediction.
Correction:
a. Ba has a lot of friends but he
spends most of his time with
Bao, Song and Khai.
b. They have different
characters.
c. Only Song and Khai are quite
reserved.
Multiple choice:
(do exercise 1 on page
14).
* Post-reading: ( 6’)
- Read the text again and answer
the questions (exercise 2 p.14)
+ a/ He feels lucky to have a lot
of friends.
b/ Bao is the most sociable.
c/ Khai likes reading.
d/ A bad things about Ba’s jokes
is that sometimes his jokes
annoy his friends.
e/ He spends his free time doing
volunteer work at a local
orphanage
- Check Ss' memory by using technique
"What and where".
- Read and then write the words again in
the correct circles.
- Present the statements on the board.
- Set the scene: These statements are
about Ba and his friends, read them and
guess which statements are True / False.
- Read the statements given and guess
which statements are True, which are
False.
- Ask Ss to open their books and read the
text on page 13.
- Read the text and check their
prediction.
- Correct false statements.
- Correct their mistakes.
- Guide Ss how to do exercise 1 (p.14)
and give the correct answers.
- Let Ss read the text again and answer
the questions.
- Read the text again and choose the best
answers on page 14.
- Read the text and answer the questions
in pairs.
- Read the answers and correct the
mistakes.
- Write the answer on the board.
* Homework<b> ( 2’)</b>
- Learn vocabulary by heart.
<b>- Week: 2 </b>
<b>- Period: 6</b>
<b>-Preparing date: 24/8/2011</b>
<b> Lesson 4 : </b>
<b>* Aim: - Writing about oneself and about other people.</b>
* Objective:
- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a paragraph about their close
friends.
* Teaching aids: - Text books.
* Procedure:
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b>(3’)
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to decribe the character about their friends in front of the
class
<b>Ss: Practice and answer the questions</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>Teacher's activities Sts' activities</b> <b>Addin</b>
<b>g</b>
* Warm-up: (Kim's game)
( 5’)
Look at the pictures and
describe the people in
the picture (p.17)
a. How many people are there
in the picture?
b. What is each person
weaning?
* Pre-writing: (10’)
Read the information
about Fam.
Answer the questions
(exercise 2 p.15).
* While-writing: (13’)
Write a paragraph about
Tam based on the
answers.
Sample:
- Ask Ss to look at the picture (p.17)
quickly. Then let Ss keep their books
closed.
- Look at the picture and answer the
questions in group.
- Divide the class in to 4 groups. The group
which answers come city the fastest wins
the game.
- Ask Ss to read the information about Tam
then answer the questions.
- Read the information and then answer the
questions
- Let Ss write a paragraph about Tam, using
the information they have just got.
- Write a paragraph about Tam, using the
information (individually).
His / Her name is...She
is...years old. He / She lives
at...in...with his...He /
She is tall,...
He / She has short...hair
Write some information
about one of their
friends, then write a
paragraph about him or
her.
* Post-writing: (5’)
Speak in front of the
class about himself /
herself.
* Homework: ( 2’)
- Ask students to write another
paragraph about one of their
family members.
their books on page 15.
- Compare with the paragraph in their books
on page 15.
- Let Ss write a paragraph about one of their
friends.
- Write a paragraph about one of their
- Get Ss to share with their partners and
correct if possible.
- Correct the mistakes if possible.
- listen and write
<b>- Week: 3 </b>
<b>- Period: 7</b> <b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date:26/8/2011</b>
Lesson 5: Language focus (p.16 - 17)
<b>* Aim: - Farther practice in simple present tense and the structure (not) + adjectives</b>
enough + to-infinitive.
* Objective: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use simple present tense to
talk about general truths and write some sentences using the structure (not) + adjective
enough + to-infinitive.
* Teaching aids: - Text book - cards - pictures.
* Procedure:
<b>1.CLASS ODER:(3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
T: Asks Ss to write a paragraph about one of their family
members.
<b>Ss: write it on the board </b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>Teacher's activities & Sts' activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
* Warm-up: (Categories).(5’)
Find but the adjectives
beginning with the letters
given.
- Example
+ T writes: a b c d
+ S writes: awful big clever disty.
* Presentation: (13’)
Pre – teach vocabulary.
- A planet: (ex: the sun, the moon,
the earth,…): hành tinh
What are they?
- Mars: sao hỏa
(Translation )
- Mercury : sao thủy
* The simple present tense is used
to express an action which is
always true.
1. stes 2. goes 3. moves
4. is 5. is 6. is
* Presentation: ( 5’)
Set the scene to introduce
the structure.
Ex:
<b>* Practice: (word cue Drill) (5’)</b>
a. Read English books/v good
b. Drive a car/ x old
c. Carry this bag/ v strong
d. Solve this problem/ x clever
* Further practice: (5’)
Exercise 4 (page 17).
a/ not big enough b/ not old
enough
c/ strong enough d/ good
* Homework: (2’)
- Divide the class in to two groups.
- Ask Ss to find out the adjectives
beginning with the letters given.
- Find out the adjectives beginning
with the letters given in groups.
- Listen and repeat.
- Present and give the meaming of new
words.
- Coppy down.
- Read in chorus ->individually.
- Gwide Ss to read new words in
chorus.
-Listen to their teacher.
- Review the simple present tense
- Let Ss do exer cise 2 on page 16.
- do exercise 2.
- Read the dialogue loudly.
- Listen and correct their
pronunciation.
- Listen and repeat.
- Set the scene to introduce the
structure.
- Practise the structure in pairs
- Analyse the structure and guide Ss
to read.
- Model two cues, the whole class
repeats.
- Let all students, work in pairs, one
asks, the other answers.
- Give feed back.
- Practise the dialogue.
- Ask Ss to do exercise 4 on page 17
in pairs.
- listen and write
- Can you hang this picture over
there?
- Ask students to write 5 sentences
structure: “(not) adjective enough
+ to infinitive”.
<b>- Week: 3 </b>
<b>- Period: 8 </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 28/8/2011</b>
Lesson 1<b> : - Getting started + listen & read ( P. 18,19 )</b>
<b> </b>
<b>* Aims: - Reading for details about a conversation on the phone </b>
* Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the telephone to make
and confirm arrangements.
* Teaching aids: - Text book.
* Procedure:
<b>1.CLASS ODER:(3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write 5 sentences about themselves using the
structure: “(not) adjective enough + to infinitive”.
<b>Ss: write them on the board </b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>Teacher's activities & Sts' activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
* Warm-up: (Matching). (5’)
Match each object (pictures on
page 18) with its name.
<i><b>* Answers : </b></i>
a. an answering machine
b. a mobile phone
c. a fax machine
d. a telephone directory
e. a public telephone
f. an address book
* Pre-reading: ( 15’)
Set the scene.
Open prediction.
a. Who made the call?
b. Who introduced herself?
- Ask Ss to match each object with its
name.
- Show the picture and ask “What are they
doing? Introduced: They are talking about
going to see a movie.
- Ask Ss to guess.
c. Who invited the other to the
movies?
d. Who arranged a meeting
places?
e. Who arrange the time?
f. Who agreed to the time?
* While-reading: (10’)
Read the conversation.
Check their prediction.
<i>*New words :</i>
<i>- Downstairs (adv)</i>
<i>- A bit (adj)</i>
<i>- Outside (adv)</i>
<i>- To make the call</i>
<i>- Introduce (v)</i>
<i>- Hold on</i>
<i>- Where is it on ?</i>
<i>- I'm using ... tonight</i>
<i>- Is 6.30 all right?</i>
+ Matching the phrases with
their meanings.
a. Hold on.
b. Is six thirty all right?
c. Where’s it on?
d. A bit far from…..
1. Nó được chiếu ở đâu?
2. Khá xa…
3. Sáu giờ 30 được chứ?
4. Chờ nhé.
Comprehension question:
a. What is Hoa’s telephone
number?
b. Which movies are they going
to see? Where?
c. How is Hoa going to see the
movies?
d. Where are they going to meet?
What time?
* Post-reading<b> ( 4’)</b>
Practice the conversation,
- Do exercises (p. 18).
- Look at the picture and answer the
questions.
- Let Ss to read the conversation.
- Read the question and guess.
- Read the conversation and check their
prediction.
- Give feetback
- Give the correct answers.
<i>a) Nga made the call</i>
<i>b) Nga introduced herself</i>
<i>c) Nga invited the other to the movies</i>
<i>d) Nga arranged a meeting place.</i>
<i>e) Hoa arranged the time.</i>
<i>f) Nga agreed to the time</i>
- T presents vocabulary and asks SS to
listen and repeat.
- Let Ss match the phrases with their
-Do exercises.
- Gives feedback
Answers : 1- d 2- c 3- a 4- b
- Ask Ss to read the conversation again
and answer the questions.
-Practice the conversation
- Read the conversation and answer the
questions.
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in
front of class .
- Remark and give feedback .
<i>a. Her telephone number is 3847329.</i>
<i>b. They are going to see the movie Dream </i>
<i>City at Sao Mai Movie Theater . </i>
<i>c. Hoa is going by bike .</i>
<i>d.They are going to meet outside the </i>
<i>theater at6.30 </i>
using the frame:
S2: Can I speak ….? This …
S1: …
S2: I’m going to see … Would
you…?
S1: Of course. But I have to ask…
Hold on….OK….says I can go,
Where’s it on?
S2: At… Movie threatre.
S1: Let’s go by…
S2: OK. Let’s meet outside the
threatre.
S1: Is … OK?
S2: All right. See you at…Bye.
S1: Bye.
<b>* Homework: (1’)</b>
- Learn vocabulary by heart, and
write the dialogue in their
exercise book.
- Let Ss practice the conversation using
the frame given.
- Move around the class and help the
students.
- asks students write
<b>- Week: 3 </b>
<b>- Period: 9 </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 30/8/2011</b>
<b>* Aim: - Practice talking on the phone</b>
* Objective: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk on the phone about
intensions with “going to”.
* Teaching aids: - Text books, cards.
* Procedure:
<b> 1.CLASS ODER:(3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to practice the dialoge with apartner in front of class
and write vocabulary.
<b>Ss: write them on the board </b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>Teacher's activities & Sts' activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<b>Warm-up: (Chatting).(5’)</b>
- Do you have a telephone at home?
- How often do you make a phone
- Ask Ss some questions.
call?
- What would you say when you pick
up the phone to answer it?
- What would you say if you are the
caller?
1. Presentation: (5’)
Do exercise 1 on page 20.
Question:
- Are they talking on the phone?
- What do they intend to do?
- What time are they meeting?
Where?
- What form of the verbs do you use
to talk about intent?
Form: S + be + going to +
infinitive.
Use: Express an intension.
2. While - speaking : (10’)
- Set the scene “ Ba and Bao are
making arrangements to play chess “
- Ask Ss to work with partners to
complete the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to play the roles
of Ba and Bao to practice the
dialogue
- Listen and give feedback
Ba : Hello . 8257012
Bao : May I speak to Ba , please .
Ba : Hello , Bao . How are you ?
Bao : I am fine . Thanks , and you ?
Ba : Great . Me too.
Bao : can you play chess tonight ?
Ba : I am sorry . I can not play chess
tonight . I am going to do my
homework
Bao : What about tomorrow
afternoon ?
Ba : Tomorrow afternoon is fine .
Bao : I will meet you at the Center
Chess Club .
Ba : At the Central Chess Club ? Ok .
Let ,<sub>s meet at the front door .</sub>
Bao : Is 2,00 o,<sub>clock OK ? </sub>
- Put the sentences in the correct order
to make a complete conversation.
- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 on page 20.
* <i>Answers</i> : 1-b 2-f 3-j 4-a 5-i 6-c
7- e 8- k 9-g 10- h 11- d
individually
Practice the complete dialogue
- Work in pairs
<i><b>+ Yes , they are </b></i>
<i><b>+ They intend to go to the pop concert</b></i>
<i><b>+ They are meeting inside the center </b></i>
<i><b>at 7.15 </b></i>
<i><b>+ be going to </b></i>
Listen to teacher carefully .
Work in pairs
Ba : Great . See you tomorrow
afternoon at 2.00 o,<sub>clock . </sub>
- Ask Ss to make the similar
arrangements and practice talking
with a partner .
3. Post – speaking : (2’)
- Ask Ss to make sentences with “
Going to + Infinitive “
Model sentences :
<b>Are you going to see a movie ?</b>
<b>Yes , I am / No , I am not .</b>
a. see a movie ( Yes )
b. play / sports ( No )
c. meet your friends ( Yes)
d. help your mother ( Yes )
e. do your homework (No)
f. watch TV ( No )
- Model two cues , then ask Ss to
repeat chorally then individually .
- Ask some Ss to practice asking and
answering in pairs .
<i><b> Listening: </b></i>
1. <i>Pre- listening</i> : (3’)
- Ask Ss to look at the form of the
telephone message on page 21 and set
the scene “ a woman phoned the
principal of Kingston junior high
school , but he was out .”
- Have Ss guess the message .
- Call on some Ss to read their
predictions and write them on the
board .
2. <i>While - listening</i> : (7’)
- Turn on the tape twice and ask Ss to
fill in the message , compare with
their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to read their
answers after checking .
* Answers :
<b>Kingston junior high school</b>
Date : ...Time : ...
For : The principal
Message : <i>Mrs Mary Nguyen wanted </i>
<i>to see you at 9 . 45 in the morning</i>
Telephone number : <i>6463720942</i>
- Call on some Ss to read them aloud .
Make similar dialogue .
Practice asking and answering
- Ask Ss to look at the form of the
telephone message on page 21 and set
the scene “a woman phoned the
principal of Kingston junior high
school but hoe was out ”
Look at the form of the telephone
message and listen to the scene
Guess the message
Read their predictions
Listen to tape carefully , compare with
their predictions .
Read their answers
3. <i>Post - listening</i> : (2’)
- Ask Ss to make a dialogue about the
information they have heard
- Go around the class and help them .
- Call on some pairs to practice the
dialogue they have made .
<b>* Homework: (1’)</b>
- Correct the mistakes in the
sentences:
1. Can I speak with Mr. Trung,
please?
2. Would you like to live a message?
3. He will be available in Monday.
* Answer:
1 . with – to 2. live – leave 3. in -
on
Practice in front of class
- asks students write them
- write them in their book.
<b>- Week: 4 </b> <b> </b>
<b>- Period: 10 </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 06/9/2011</b>
<b>Aim: Reading the paragraph for details about Alexander Graham Bell.</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more </b>
about Alexander Graham Bell.
<b>Teaching aids: Textbook.</b>
<b>Procedure: </b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to practice the dialoge with apartner in front of class and write
vocabulary.
<b>Ss: write them on the board </b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm – up:</i> (Brainstorming).(5’)
To chat with friend. To
communicate
- Let Ss answer the question by
coming to the board and write
-Answer the question
<i>Pre - reading:</i> (10’)
Pre – teach vocabulary:
country to live
- (to) transmit : (translation)
truyền đi
- (to) conduct : điều khiển
- (to) demonstrate : chứng minh
- a device : thiết bị
- a deaf – mute . a person who is
unable to hear and speak
-to come up with : t×m thấy
T/F statements prediction
a. Alexander G. Bell was born
in the U.S.A
b. He worked with deaf- mute
patients in a hospital in
Boston
c. Thomas Watson was Bell’s
assistant
d. Bell and Watson introduced
the telephone in 1877
e. Bell experimented with way
of transmitting speech
between deaf- mute over a
long distance.
f. Bell demonstrated his
invention at a lot of
exhibition
<b>While - reading : (15’)</b>
* <i>True or false</i> :
-Turn on the tape 2 times and ask
them to look at their books to read the
text , then check their prediction
Guess Answer Correction
a F He was born in
Edinburgh in
Scotland
b F He worked with
deaf – mute
patients at Boston
University
- Present and given the meanings of
new words
- Listen and repeat
- copy down
- Let Ss repeat the words in chorus
then rub out word by word but leave
the circles.
- Listen and repeat. the words in
chorus
- Get Ss to write the words again in
the correct circle
- Give feedback.
-Present T/F statements on the
board and ask Ss guess which
statements are true and which are
false.
- Listen to their teacher.
- Read the text.
- Read the text again and check their
prediction.
- Read and put the sentences in the
correct order.
- Have Ss correct false statements.
- Give feedback.
<i><b>a.F b.F c. T d. F e. F f. T</b></i>
Listen , read the text , then check
their predictions .
- Correct the false ones
What is the
c T
d F He introduced
telephone in 1876
e F He experimented
with ways of
transmitting
speech over a
long distance
f T
- Ask some Ss to read the correct
answers aloud .
* <i>Ordering</i> :
- Ask Ss to look at the exercise and
read the events of Bell,<sub>s life , then put</sub>
them in the correct order .
- Have them compare with their
partners
- Call on some Ss to read their
answers aloud .
- Correct and give feedback
= > Alexander Graham Bell
1. Was born in Scotland
2. went to live in Canada
3. went to live in the USA
4. worked with people who could
neither speak nor hear
5. worked with Thomas Watson
6. successfully demonstrate his
invention
7. invented the telephone .
- Call on some Ss to read all the
IV / Post - reading : Writing it up
<i><b>(3’)</b></i>
- Get Ss to write a paragraph about
Bell,<sub>s life , using the information </sub>
from the text
- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their
writings in front of class .
- Correct mistakes if any and give
Suggestions :
V / Homework : (2’)
-. Copy down their writings .
-. Do the exercises in workbook .
-. Prepare the next lesson .
Read them aloud
Do the exercise
Read their answers
Read their correct sentences aloud
Write individually . Compare with
<b>- Week: 4 </b>
<b>- Period: 11 </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 08/9/2011</b>
<b>Aim: Writing a message</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a telephone</b>
message
<b>Teaching aids: Textbook.</b>
<b>Procedure: </b>
1.CLASS ODER<b> : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to talk summarize about Alexander Graham Bell
<b>Ss: practice </b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i><b>Warm- up:</b><b> (Jumbled words) </b></i>
<i><b>(5’)</b></i>
1. mcuestor = customer
2. ayddmi = midday
3. essgmea = message
4. nifuretu = furniture
5. rvseice = service
<i><b>Pre- writing: </b><b> (10’)</b></i>
Chatting:
Have you ever taken a
telephone message? When
you take a message, what
should be mentioned in the
message? (Date, time, who
sent, to whom, content)
Pre-teach vocabulary:
- a customer: a person who
comes to buy sth at a shop
- a delivery: sự giao hàng
- stationery (n): papers, pens,
rulers, envelopes
- write the words whose letters are in
a random order on the board
- Divide the class into 2 teams
- The team which writes more correct
words first wins the game
- Talk to Ss about a telephone
message
- Listen and answer the question
- Ask some question
- Listen and repeat
- Copy down
- Present and give the meaning of
new words
- Guide Ss to read new words in
chorus
- Listen and repeat in chorus
- check memory by technique “Rub
out and remember”
- to pick so up: đãn ai
<i><b>While- writing:</b><b> (15’)</b></i>
+ Reading and gap filling
- Ask Ss to read the message and fill
- Ask them to work in pairs
- Call on some Ss to read their
answers aloud .
Correct and give feed back
Answers :
<i> A customer phoned the Thang </i>
<i>Loi Delivery Service on May 12 </i>
<i>just before midday . She wanted to </i>
<i>speak to Mr Ha but he was out . So </i>
<i>Mr Tam took a message for Mr Ha .</i>
<i>The customer,<sub>s name was Mrs . Lien</sub></i>
<i>and she wanted to know about her </i>
<i>furniture delivery . She wanted Mr </i>
<i>Ha to call her . She said Mr Ha </i>
<i>could reach her at 8645141 after </i>
<i>lunch . </i>
- Ask Ss to read the passage 2 to get
information and write the message .
- Let Ss write individually then
share with a partner .
- Call on some Ss to read their
answers
- Correct and give feedback .
* Answers :
Thanh Cong Delivery Service
Date : June 16
Time : After midday
For : Mrs Van
Message : Mr Nam called about
his stationery order . He wanted
you to call him at 8634082
Taken by : Mr Toan .
- Ask Ss to write another message ,
using the scene “ Tom phoned
Nancy , but she was out . Lisa ,
Nancy ,<sub>s sister took a message for </sub>
Nancy . Help Lisa to write a
message “
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue
between Lisa and Tom then , write
the message .
- Let Ss work in pairs .
Read and do the exercise .
Read their answers aloud
Read the information and write the
message .
Read their answers
Copy down
Write a message , using the
information .
* Post - writing : (4’)
- Call on some Ss to read their
answers aloud
- Correct and give feedback
* Answers :
Date : ( ...)
Time : ( ...)
For : Nancy
Message : Tom called about playing
tennis this afternoon. He will come
over to pick you up at 1.30
Taken by : Lisa
1. Copy the message on their
notebooks .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .
* feedback :
Read their answers .
Listen and copy
<b>- Week: 4 </b>
<b>- Period: 12 </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 10/9/2011</b>
<i> </i>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Listening for details and further practice in adverbs of place</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to complete </b>
telephone message by listening and further practice in adverbs of place
<b>Teaching aids: Textbook.</b>
<b>Procedure: </b>
1.CLASS ODER<b> : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to talk about telephone conversation in pair
<b>Ss: practice </b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i><b>* Warm up: Brainstorm(5’)</b></i>
Thing to do
<i><b>* Possible answers.</b></i>
- see a movie - play soccer
- watch TV - do home work
- meet friends - play chess
<i><b>* Presentation: (29’)</b></i>
1.<i>Talk about intentions with going to : </i>
<i>Introduce the form and use of going to</i>
<b>-</b> Form : S + be going to +
<b>infinitive </b>
<b>-</b> Use : express an intention
Ex 1 :
<b>-</b> Ask Ss to do exercise 1 . They
have to work with a partner and
say what the people are going to
do
- Example :
T : Nga has a movie ticket . What is
she going to do ?
S : She is going to see a movie .
- Call on some pairs to read their
sentences aloud .
- Correct and give feedback :
a. They are going fishing
b. She is going to read the new model
c. She is going to do her homework .
d. He is going to watch an action movie
on TV tonight .
e. She is going to give him a birthday
present .
Ex 2 : Complete the list ( Questionnaire
)
a) Ask Ss to work in pairs
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in
front of class .
- Listen and give feedback .
What are you going to do on
the weekend?
Are you going
to.. You
Your
partner
see a movie
- Have Ps write about things they can
do.
- Call some Ps to write on the bb
Listen and copy down
Work in pairs
Read the example
Read their complete sentences
Work in pairs
Stick in column “You “ and Your
partner
- Demonstrate in front of class .
play sports
meet your
friends?
help your
parents?
do your
homework?
watch TV?
b) Get Ss to work in pairs
- Have some pairs demonstrate in front
of class .
- Give feedback .
* Jumbled words
- Let Ss work individually , one student
one word
1. tdeousi = outside
2. siiden = inside
3. hetre = there
4. erhe = here
5. stupairs = upstairs
6. wonstaird = downstairs
- Ask Ss to go to the board and write
the meanings words .
- Call on some Ss to read all the
adverbs aloud .
Ex 3 : Complete the speech bubbles .
Use each adverb in the box once .
- Set the scene : “ Ba is playing hide
and seek with his cousin , Mr Tuan “
- Let Ss work in pairs , then compare
with another pair ( at their table )
- Call on some Ss to read out the
speech bubbles
- Give feedback
<i>a. Where is Tuan ? I think he is </i>
<i>upstairs </i>
<i>b. No , he is not here . </i>
<i>c. He is not downstairs and he is not </i>
<i>upstairs .</i>
<i>d. Perhaps , he is outside . </i>
<i>e. No , he is not there . </i>
<i>f. I am not outside . I am inside , Ba. </i>
- Call on some Ss to read the complete
Go to the board to write the meanings
and read them aloud .
Listen to the scene .
Work in pairs
Read out the speech bubbles
Read the complete sentences aloud .
sentences
III / Homework : (1’)
1.Copy the complete exercises in their
2. Write six sentences about your house
, using adverbs of place .
3. Prepare the next lesson .
* Feedback :
<b></b>
<b>--- Week: 5 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 13</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 14/9/2011</b>
<b> </b>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Helping Ss to read the dialogue for details and practise the modal </b>
verbs: must have to, ought to .
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the </b>
dialogue and use modal verbs to talk about the housework
<b>Teaching aids: Textbook.</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to talk about “ BE GOING TO “ and rewrite the
sentences in exercise 1( page 27)
<b>Ss: answer and write on board</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm- up: </i><b>(Kim’s game) (5’)</b>
Look at the pictures on page
27 and write the chores she
often does at home
a. washes dishes b.Make the
bed
c. cook d. sweep the
floor
e. tidy up f. feed the
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and
write the chores she does at home
- listen and correct their mistakes.
- give feedback
chicken
<i>Pre- teach vocabulary: <b>( 8’)</b></i>
- a steamer (n): nồi hấp
- a cupboard (n): tủ ly
- a sauce pan (n): cái chảo
- chore (n): việc vặt
- a sink (n): bồn rửa
<i>Presentation: <b>(15’)</b></i>
Set the scene at the dialogue
Student listen to the
dialoguewhile looking at
their books
Complete the list of the thing
Nam has to do
<i><b>Nam has to - cook dinner</b></i>
<i><b> - go to the market to </b></i>
<i><b>buy fish and vegetables</b></i>
<i><b> - call his Aunt , Ms </b></i>
<i><b>Chi and ask her to meet his mother</b></i>
<i><b>at grandma</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s house. </sub></b></i>
<i>Exchange: </i>
what do you have to do?
- I must wash dishes
<b>Production : (5’)</b>
- Ask Ss to write the lists of the
things they have to do on
Sundays .
<i>Beginning with</i> : On Sunday
morning , I have to tidy my
room ...
- Call on some Ss to read their
writings in front of class.
- Correct mistakes if any and ask
them to copy .
<b>Homework : (2’)</b>
1. Learn by heart all new words
they have learnt .
2. Do their exercises in
workbook .Prepare the next
lesson .
- Present new words on the board
- Listen and repeat
- copy down
- Guide Ss to read new words
- Listen and read in chorus
- Check their memory by using
technique “what and where”
- Fill in the circles with the correct
words
- Set the scene to introduce the
dialogue
- Get Ss to listen the dialogue
- Look at their books and listen to
the dialogue
- Let Ss do exercises
- Read sentence by sentence and
- Elicit to show the form of the
structure
- Look at their books and listen to
the dialogue
Write individually
Demonstrate their writings
Listen and copy .
<i><b>- Form:</b></i>
<i>Has/ Have to + infinitive </i>
<i>= must + infinitive </i>
<b>- Week: 5 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 14</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 16/9/2011</b>
<b>Aim: Practising speaking</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the </b>
prepositions of place to talk about the positions of furniture in the house
<b>Teaching aids: picture on page 28- 29</b>
<b>Procedure: </b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to read the dialoge and write vocabulary in part
getting started
<b>Ss: answer and write on board</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm- up:</i> (Kim’s game) (5’)
- Look at the picture (p. 28) and write
the position of each item
<b>Pre - Speaking : (8’)</b>
- Ask Ss the positions of the items in the
pictures .
Where is the clock ? It is above the
fridge .
Where is the fruit ? It is in the bowl .
Where is the flowers ? They are on the
table .
Where is the rice cooker ? It is next to the
bwl of fruit .
Where is the cupboard ? It is on the
wall , above the counter .
Where are the knives ? They are on the
wall , under the cupboard .
Where is the dish rack ? It is on the
- Show the picture of the kitchen
to Ss
- Skim the picture and write
down as many things as they can
remember
- Answer the questions
- Take away the picture and ask
Ss to write the things
- Practise talking about the
position of each item
- Ask Ss the positions of the
items in the pictures
Talk about the position of the
furniture.
counter , next to the bowl of fruit .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .
<b>While - speaking : (10’)</b>
- Get Ss to work in pairs , talking about
the position of each item
Ex : The calendar is on the wall , above
the stove . - Call on some pairs to
demonstrate in front of class.
- Give feedback :
+ The sink is next to the stove .
+ The cupboard is on the wall , above the
counter .
+ The knives are on the wall , under the
cupboard .
+ The bowl of fruit is between the rice
cooker and the dish rack .
+ The clock is on the wall , above the
fridge .
+ The flowers are on the table .
- Ask them to read all the suggested
sentences aloud .
IV / Post - speaking : (7’)
<b>-</b> Set the scene : Mrs Vui bought new
furniture for her living room , but
she can not decide where to put it .
You should help her to arrange the
furniture”
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and talk
about their ideas .
Ask Ss to practice speaking :
<b>-</b> If they agree , they may use :
Ok
You are right
<b>-</b> If they disagree , they may use :
No , I think we ,<sub>d better / ought to </sub>
put ...
I think it should be ...
Example : + Let’s put the clock on the
wall, between the shelf and the
picture
- OK I think we ought to put the
TV and the stereo on the shelf
- I think the coffee table should be
between the couch and the arm
chair
+ Let’s put the telephone next to
- Ask Ss to look at the picture
and talk about their ideas.
- Practise talking about the
position of each item in pairs
- Listen and correct their
mistakes.
- Move around the class and help
Read all the sentences aloud .
Copy down
the couch
- I think we should put the
magazines above the books on the
shelves
- Call on some pairs to practice speaking .
V / Homework : (2’)
1. Describe their living room or bedroom .
2. Do exercise in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .
* Feedback :
Practice speaking .
Listen and copy .
<b>- Week: 5 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 15</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 18/9/2011</b>
<i> </i>
<b>Aim: Listening and further practice in modal verb: ought to</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to identify the</b>
right item by listening further practice in modal verb: ought to
<b>Teaching aids: Text book </b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to describe their living room or bedroom in
front of the class.
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm-up:</i> (Bingo) (5’)
Suggested list of food: chicken,
<i><b>beef, cake, candy, garlic, noodles,</b></i>
<i><b>bread, rice, ham, peas, ……</b></i>
II / Pre - listening : (3’)
* Predictions :
- Get Ss to look at page 30 and guess 4
things they use to cook the Special
Chinese Fried Rice “
- Call on Ss to read their predictions and
- Call out it word in a loud voice
- Write down on their notebook 5
things they eat
- Listen to the teacher carefully.
The first person crossing out on
find things shouts ”Bingo” and
urns the game
- Get Ss to look at page 30 and
guess 4 things they use to cook
- Prediction
write them on the board .
III / While - listening : (10’)
- Turn on the tape 3 times and ask them
to check their predictions .
- Give feedback
c. Garlic and green peppers
d. Ham and peas .
- Turn on the tape once more to check
the answers again .
IV / Post - listening : (5’)
Mapped dialogue
- Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Mrs
Tu to make a dialogue by listening the
tape again .
<i>Lan : Can I help ..., Mom ? </i>
<i>Mrs Tu : Sure you can </i>
<i>cook ...</i>
<i> Use the big pan please .</i>
<i>Lan : ...?</i>
<i>Mrs Tu : Just a little . Wait until it is hot </i>
<i>and then fry the garlic and the green </i>
<i>peppers . </i>
<i>Lan : ...? </i>
<i>Mrs Tu : Yes . And you can put the rice </i>
<i>and s teaspoon of salt in . </i>
<i>Lan : YUmmy ! It smells ... . </i>
- Call on some pairs to practice the
dialogue in front of class .
- Correct pronunciations if any .
<i>Presentation: <b>(2’)</b></i>
Set the scene :”Hoa is very sad
because she failed her English test .
What do you say to advise her?”
You should study harder
- use: “should” is used to give
advice to some one
- Meaning: nên
<i>Practice: <b>(5’)</b></i>
Give advice to people in the
picture (p. 35)
a. I failed my English test .
you should study harder
b. I’m late.
You should get up early
c. I’m fat
- Correct their mistakes
Listen to the tape carefully to
check their predictions .
Copy the answers .
Listen and check once more .
Practice in pairs to make a
dialogue .
Practice in front of class
- Ask Ss to do exercise (p. 35)
- Listen to their teacher and copy
down
- Look at the pictures. Use “should
“to give advice to the people
Move around the class and help
students
You should eat more fruit
and…
d. My tooth aches
You should see a dentist
<i>Production<b>:</b> <b> (4’)</b></i>
Noughts and crosses:
His tooth /
ache
Hoa / late My room /
untidy
The floor /
dirty
Bao /
overweight
She / thin
My
English /
bad
Her grades
/ bad
The
washing
machine not
work
<i>Homework: <b>(1’)</b></i>
Write some advice when your friends
feels sick
Play game ”Noughts and crooes”
Listen and copy
<b>- Week: 6 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 16</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 23/9/2011</b>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Reading for details safety precautions in the house and further </b>
practice in why – questions and answers - Because
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand</b>
the safety precautions in the house and use why - because
<b>Teaching aids: Text book – picture</b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
T: Asks Ss to write some advice when your friends feels
sick on black boad.
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm up:</i> (Brain storming).(5’)
Drug
electricity
- Eliciting.
- Answering.
- Copy down on their notebooks.
Boiling
water
knife gas
<i> </i>
<i>Pre – reading: <b>(10’)</b></i>
Dre – teach vocabulary:
- A match : que diªm
- An object : một vật
- Safety (a): an toàn
- (to) destroy (v): phá hy
- (to) injure (v): bị thương
<b>T / F statements prediction:</b>
a. It is safe to leave medicine
around the house
b. Drugs can look like candy
c. A kitchen is a suitable
place to play
d. Playing with one match can
not start a fire
e. Putting a knife into an
electrical socket is
dangerous
<i>f.</i> Young children do not
understand that many
household objects are
dangerous
<i>While – reading: <b>(10’)</b></i>
Read the text and check their
prediction
Correct the false statements
Answer the question
<i>a.</i> Why must we put all
chemicals and drugs in
locked cupboard
<i>b.</i> Why mustn’t we let children
play in the kitchen?
<i>c.</i> Why mustn’t children play
with matches?
<i>d.</i> Why must we cover
electrical sockets?
<i>e.</i> Why do we have to put all
dangerous objects out of
children’s reach?
- Presents new words on the board
- Listen and repeat in chorus.
- Guides Ss to read new words.
- Check Ss’ memory by using
- Two students run forward and slap
the word on the blackboard. The one
who first slaps the correct words is
the winner.
- Present the statements on the board
- Listen to their teacher
- Read the statement given and guess
which is true, which is false
- Give feedback
- Ask Ss to read the statements and
guess which in true, which is false
- Read the text in silent and check
their prediction
<i><b>- give feedback</b></i>
<b> F – T - F - F – T - T</b>
- Read the text loudly
- Correct the false statements
- Give instruction
<i><b>- Give feedback:</b></i>
a. Because children often try to eat
and drink them
b Because the kitchen is a dangerous
place to place
c. Because playing with one match
can cause fire .
d. Because children often try to put
something into electrical sockets and
electricity can kill .
e. Because the dangerous objects can
injure or kill children .
<i>Post – reading: <b>(8’)</b></i>
<b> Discussion </b>
- Ask Ss to work in groups ,
discussing about the topic .
1. Safety precautions in the street .
2. Safety precautions at school .
<i>Homework:</i> (2’)
1. Copy down the answers above .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .
- Move around the class and help Ssl
- Practise asking and answering the
questions in pairs
<b>- Week: 6 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 17</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 25/92011</b>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Writing a description of a room</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a </b>
description of a room in their house
<b>Teaching aids: </b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to read the text and then answer the question on
black boad.
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm-up:</i> (chatting) (5’)
Ask something about the room on
page 32
- Which room is this?
- What’s this? Where is it?
<i>Pre- writing: <b>(10’)</b></i>
<b>Pre- teach vocab:</b>
folder
beneath
towel rack
dish rack
lighting fixture
* Checking : Rub out and
<i><b>remember </b></i>
2. Reading
- Ask Ss to read the description of
Hoa,<sub>sroom , then ask some </sub>
comprehension questions
a. What is there on the left of the
room ?
b. Where is the bookshelf ?
c. What is there on the right side of the
room ?
d. Where is the wardrobe ?
- Call on some pairs to practice in front
of class .
- Correct and give feedback :
a. There is a desk on the left of the
room .
b. The bookshelf is above the desk .
c. There is a window on the right side
of the room .
d. The wardrobe is beside the window
and opposite the desk .
- Call on some Ss to read the
descriptions of Hoa,<sub>s room aloud . </sub>
<b>While - writing : (15’)</b>
- Ask Ss to describe Hoa,<sub>s kitchen , </sub>
using the given cues .
- Ask Ss to share with their partners .
- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their
writings in front of class .
- Correct the mistakes from some
descriptions if any .
- Ask the questions
- Listen and answer the questions
- Present new words and guide
Ss to read them
- Copy down listen and reading
chorus
- Check Ss’ memory by
technique ”Rub out and
remember”
Read the description and practice
asking and answering the
questions
Read the description aloud .
Work individually
- Give feedback
<i>This is Hoa,<sub>s kitchen . </sub></i>
<i>There is a refrigerator in the right </i>
<i>corner of the room . </i>
<i>Next to the refrigerator are the stove </i>
<i>and the oven </i>
<i>On the other side of the oven , there is </i>
<i>a sink and next to the sink is a towel </i>
<i>rack . </i>
<i>The disk rack stands on the counter , </i>
<i>on the right of the window and beneath</i>
<i>the selves . </i>
<i>On the selves and on the counter </i>
<i>beneath the window, there are jars of </i>
<i>sugar , flour and tea . </i>
<i>In the middle of the kitchen , there are </i>
<i>a table and four chairs . </i>
<i>The lighting fixture is above the table , </i>
<i>and directly beneath the lighting </i>
<i>fixture is a vase with flowers . </i>
- Call on some Ss to read the completed
descriptions aloud .
<b>Post- writing : (3’) </b>
<b>Speaking </b>
- Ask Ss to talk to their partners about
their room / living room / kitchen .
- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their
speeches in front of class .
<b>Homework : (2’)</b>
1. Write a description of their living
room
2. Do exercises( ...)in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .
* Feedback :
Demonstrate their writings in
front of class
Read the completed writing
aloud .
Practice speaking .
Demonstrate in front of class .
Listen and copy
<b>- Week: 6 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 18</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 27/9/2011</b>
<b>Aim: Further practice in reflexive pronouns</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the </b>
reflexive pronouns
<b>Teaching aids: Text book </b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write a description of their living room on
black boad.
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities Adding</b>
<i>Warm-up:</i> (Brains storming) (5’)
tidy up do our
homework
cook
clean the floor
fix theTV set
repair the machine
<i>Presentation: <b>(12’)</b></i>
Set the scene: “you do your home
work and no one help you what do
you say? ”
<b>Form: we use I with myself</b>
You yourself
He himself
She herself
We ourselves
They themselves
<i>Practice: <b>(7’)</b></i>
Word cue drill:
a. You / do / homework
Did you do your homework?
Yes. I did it myself
b. He / fix / washing machine
c. Mary / cook / dinner
d. These student / paint / the picture
e. You / do / your chores
<i>Further practice: <b>(7’)</b></i>
Complete the dialogues, using the
- Eliciting
- Write thing do they at home
- Listen and copy down
- Set the scene to introduce the
structure
- Listen and repeat chorally
individually
- Explain the reflexive
pronouns
- Practise the question and
then the answers
- run through the vocabulary
- Model and then ask Ss to
repeat in chorus individuals
- read the open dialogue and
fill in the blank with suitable
reflexive pronouns
- give instruction
<b>Things you</b>
<b>can do</b>
Things you
can not do
reflexive pronouns:
a. Miss Lien: Did S.O help Ba draw that
picture?
Bao: No, he did it himself
b. Nga the repairman can’t fix the
washing machine until tomorrow
c. Aunt Thanh: What’s the matter?
Hoa: I cut (2) …..
d. e. page 36
<i>Homework: <b>(3’)</b></i>
Write 3 sentences with reflexive
pronouns and 3 sentences with emphasis
pronouns
- give feedback
- Guide Ss how to do exercise
- Practice speaking in pairs
- Listen and give the correct
answer
<b>- Week: 7 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 19</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date:</b>
<b>I.The objectives:</b>
- To revise all the knowledge that they have studied from the start of the new
- To prepare well for the test
<b>II.The teaching aids : </b>
- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, reference books,...
<b>III. The teaching procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write Write 3 sentences with reflexive
pronouns and 3 sentences with emphasis pronouns on black boad.
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Teacher’s and Students’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Contents</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i><b>* Warm up: (5’)</b></i>
? Retell the main grammar of unit
1,2,3
<i><b>* Presentation (15’)</b></i>
? The use and form of the tense. <b>I. Present simple tense</b>
- Use
? The position of adverbs?
? Repent the use form of tense
? Make sentences
? The use of it
<i><b>* Practice (10’)</b></i>
? Give examples
? Make sentence
? Repeat the use of must, have to,
ought to
- Correct. If necessary
? play lucky number
(in 4 groups)
<i><b>* Production (3’)</b></i>
Have Ps read in chorus.
<i><b>* Homework (2’)</b></i>
Ask Ps to study harder for the
next exam.
- Form: S + am/is/ are + (o)
<i><b> v/ v_ s, es</b></i>
- E.g.: I am a teacher.
She plays soccer
Adverbs: always, often….
<b>II. Past simple tense</b>
- use
form: S+ v- past + (o)
E.g.: I was at home yesterday evening
She went to HCM city last year
- Adverbs: last, ago , yesterday…
<b>III. Enough:</b>
- Before nouns & after adjectives
-E.g.: there are enough chairs for us to
sit
- The tea is cold enough to drink.
<b>IV. Be going to</b>
- For intention and prediction
- E.g.: we are going to have a day off
next week
- The wind is strong the door is going
to slam.
<b>V. Modal verbs</b>
- <i>must/ have to</i> for obligation
- <i>ought to</i> for advice
<b>VI. Reflexive pronoun</b>
I - myself
You - yourself/yourselves
We - ourselves
<b>- Week: 7 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 21</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 04/10/2011</b>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Reading the dialogue about the life of many year ago</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to tell the </b>
activities people use to do in the past
<b>Teaching aids: Text book </b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to repeat the structures in last lesson from Unit
1,2,3
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b> 3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm-up:</i> (getting started) (5’)
Look at the picture on page 38 and write the
names of the things that do not belong to the
past
<i><b>Pre- reading:</b><b> (10’)</b></i>
<i><b>Pre – teach vocab:</b></i>
- <i>to look after = to take care of :</i> chăm sóc
- Equipment (n): dụng cụ,thiết bị
- example (n): vÝ dụ
- give instruction
- Look at the picture and
write the names of the
things
- give feedback
<b>* Answers : </b>
<i><b>- The TV </b></i>
<i><b>- The radio </b></i>
<i><b>- The mobile </b></i>
<i><b>- The light fixture </b></i>
<i><b>- Modern clothing / </b></i>
<i><b>school uniforms </b></i>
- a folk tale(n): truyện d©n gian
- Traditional ( adj ) : truyền thống
- a great grandma (n): bà cố (nội,ngoại)
Checking: what and where
<i><b>True / false statement prediction</b></i>
a. Nga is used to live on a farm
b. Nga’s grandma didn’t go to school
c. She has an easy and happy life when she
was young
d. There wasn’t any modern equipment at
her time
e. “The lost shoe” is a short story
<i><b>While- reading:</b><b> (15’)</b></i>
- Turn on the tape 2 times and look at their books
to read the dialogue between Nga and her
Grandma to check their predictions
- Ask them to correct the false statements .
<i>1. Grandma used to love on farm </i>
<i>3. She had a hard life . </i>
<i>5. It is an old folk tale . </i>
* Comprehension :
- Get Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering
questions
- Give feedback
<i><b>a. She used to live on a farm . </b></i>
<i><b>b. Because she had to stay at home and help </b></i>
<i><b>her Mom to look after her younger brothers </b></i>
<i><b>c. She used to cook the meals , clean the house </b></i>
<i><b>and wash the clothes . </b></i>
<i><b>d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and </b></i>
<i><b>her great father used to tell stories . </b></i>
<i><b>e. She asked her grandma to tell her the tale “ </b></i>
<i><b>The lost shoe “ </b></i>
- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions .
* Fact or opinion
- Have Ss read the statements part 3 and decide which is
a fact and which is a pinion .
<b>Statements</b> <b>Fac</b>
<b>t</b>
<b>Opi</b>
<b>a. I used to live on a farm .</b>
<b>b. There was not any electricity</b>
<b>.</b>
<b>c. Mom had to do everything </b>
<b>X</b>
<b>X</b>
<b>X</b>
<b>X</b>
- Listen and repeat
- Copy down
- Check Ss’ memory by
technique “what and
where”
- write the words in the
correct circles
- Present the sentences
on the board
- Ask Ss to do exercises
- read the sentences
given and predict which
is true and which is false
- give feedback :
<i><b>F, T, F, T, F</b></i>
- Listen to the tape and
look at their books to
Practice asking and
answering the
questions .
<b>equipment . </b>
<b>d. My father used to tell us </b>
<b>stories </b>
<b>e. The best one was the lost </b>
<b>shoe . </b>
<b>f. Traditional stories are great . </b>
<b>X</b>
<b>X</b>
- Give feedback
* Post - reading : (3’) Survey
<b>Did you use to ...? </b> <b>Name</b>
<b>-</b> <b>Get up late .</b>
<b>-</b> <b>Ride bicycle too fast .</b>
<b>-</b> <b>Go to school .</b>
<b>-</b> <b>Eat too much candy . </b>
<b>-</b> <b>Forget to do your </b>
<b>homework </b>
- Give feedback by asking Ss some questions to
check “ Who used to get up late / ride bicycle
too fast ...? “
- Write it down .
<i>* <b>Homework</b> : <b>(2’)</b></i>
1. Write the result of their survey .
2. Learn by heart new words .
3. Prepare the next lesson
Practice in groups
Demonstrate in front of
class .
Listen and copy .
<b>- Week: 8</b>
<i><b>- Period: 22</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 06/10/2011</b>
<b>Aim: Speaking about the way things used to be and the way they are </b>
now
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “used </b>
to” to talk about the things they used to do
<b>Teaching aids: Text book </b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write the result of their survey and new
words .
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities Adding</b>
<b>Warm-up: (Jumbled words) (3’)</b>
- rieletcicty = Electricity
- menttaenterin = Entertainment
- rkmaet = Market
- permasuekt = Supermarket
Recall the conversation between Nga
and her grandma , then ask “ Where
did Nga,<sub>s grandma always live ? “ -> </sub>
She always lived on a farm .
- Ask : “ Another word for <i>always lived</i> “ .
Ask Ss to use Used to to make question and
answer.
“ Where did Nga ,<sub>s grandma use to live ? “ </sub>
She used to live on a farm .
Form : S + Used to + inf
<i><b> S + did not use to + inf </b></i>
<i><b> Did + S + use to + inf ? </b></i>
Expressing a past habit , or an action
usually happened in the past .
Practice
Word cue drill
a. Live / Hue / Hanoi
b. Have / long hairs / short hairs
c. Get up / late / early
d. Walk to school / bicycle
e. Study / evening / early morning
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the cues above .
* While - speaking : (5’)
- Get Ss to work in closed pairs , then open
pairs .
- Ask them to compare 2 pictures , using “
USED TO “ to talk about the actions in the
past , using these ideas below :
1. Where did they live in the past ? And
now ?
2. How did they travel ?
3. What is about the electricity ?
4. What is about their life / work ?
5. Did children use to go to school ?
6. What is about their entertainment ?
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front
of class
- Give feedback .
* <i>Suggested answers</i> :
Play games
Practice reading the
conversation and answer the
questions
Listen and copy
Practice speaking with cues
1. People used to live in small houses . Now
they live in big houses and buildings.
2. People used to walk . Now they can go by
cars or motorbikes .
3. Now , there is electricity everywhere .
4. People used to work hard all the time .
Now they have a lot of time for entertainment
.
5. Most children used to stay at home . Now ,
they all go to school .
6. Children used to play traditional games
such as hide and seek , skip rope ... outdoors .
Now , they have a lot of modern games –
video games .
* Post - speaking : (5’) Write it up
- Correct common mistakes .
* Pre - listening : (5’)
Introduce the topic of the listening task
<i>1. Pre – teach vocabulary :</i>
- Foolish (a) = ngí ngÈn , ngèc nghiÕch
- greedy ( a) = tham lam
- Gold (n) ( realia )
- to lay -> laid – laid ( Picture )
- amazement (n) = ngạc nhiên , vui nhộn
* Checking : What and where
2. Prediction :
- Ask Ss to predict the moral lesson of the
story .
- Have them look at four titles and guess
which is the most suitable to the story .
- Call on some Ss to read their predictions
and write them on the board .
* While - listening : (5’)
1. Checking the prediction
- Turn on the tape twice and ask them to
check their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to read their results and
give feed back : “ Don,<sub>t be foolish and greedy</sub>
“
- Turn on the tape once more to check their
results again .
2. Find out the verbs in the story :
- Ask Ss what tense is used in the story
Demonstrate in front of class
Work individually .
Listen and copy
Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually
Copy down
Play game
Work in groups to predict .
Read their predictions
aloud .
Listen to the tape and check
their predictions
Read their results and write
down .
Listen and find out the verbs
in the tape
( Simple past tense )
- Have Ss listen again and try to write as
many verbs as possible . The student who
writes more verbs get good marks .
- Call on some Ss to read the verbs aloud .
- Give feedback:
<i><b>went / discovered / laid / shouted / finished / </b></i>
<i><b>could not / were / ran / looked / wanted / </b></i>
<i><b>decided</b></i>
- Ask Ss to give the infinitives of these verbs.
* * *Post - listening : (5’) Mapped
<i><b>dialogue</b></i>
Lan : ...lunch ?
Nga : No . I ate noodles .
Lan : How ... school ?
Nga : I rode a bicycle to school .
Lan : Which subject did you have yesterday ?
Nga : ... math .
Lan : ...?
Nga : I was at home .
- Ask them to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
class .
- Correct and give feedback .
* Homework : (2’)
1. Copy the completed dialogue in their
notebooks .
2. Do exercises ... in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .
Give the infinitives of these
Practice in pairs
Listen and copy .
<b>--- Week: 8</b>
<i><b>- Period: 23</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 08/10/2011</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand</b>
and retell the story “the lost shoe”
<b>Teaching aids: Text book , word cards for drilling</b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write the completed dialogue on board
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Addin</b>
<b>g</b>
* Warm up : (5’) Brainstorming
Name some folks tales that you have read .
Possible answers :
- Cây tre trăm đốt ( one hundred-section
bamboo )
- Tấm cám
- Hoàng tử Cóc ( The frog Prince )
- Đôi hài 7 dặm ( Seven mile shoes )
- Bạch tuyết và bảy chú lùn ( Snow white and 7
dwarfs )
* Pre - reading : (10’)
Introduce the topic of the passage reading and
some new words to Ss .
1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- cruel (a) = độc ác , ác nghiệt
- upset (a) = worried
- fairy (n) = truỵện cæ tÝch
- magical (a) -> magically (adv)
- rag (n) ( realia )
- to fall in love with = yªu
- immediately (adv ) = ngay lËp tøc
* Checking : ROR
2. T / F statements predictions
- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict
Statements Guess Key
Play games
Copy some names of the
stories in English .
Listen and copy
Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings and
copy .
Play games
1. Little Pea,<sub>s father is poor </sub>
farmer
2. Her father got married
again after his wife died .
3. Her new mother was
beautiful and nice to her .
4. She worked hard all day .
5. She did not have new
clothes to take part in the
festival .
T
T
F
T
F
- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board
* While - reading : (15’)
1. Checking the predictions :
- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look
at their text books to check their predictions
- Sentence 3 : Her new mother was cruel to
her .
- Sentence 5 : A fairy gave her beautiful
clothes.
- Call on 2 Ss to read the story – Correct
mistakes if any .
2. Comprehension questions
- Ask Ss to work in pairs answering the
questions
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering .
- Listen and give feedback
a. She was a poor farmer ,<sub>s daughter . </sub>
b. She made her do the chores all day .
c. Before the festival started , a fairy appeared
and magically changed her rags into beautiful
clothes .
d. He decided to marry Little Pea because the
e. Ss answer themselves .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
class.
3. Gap filling : Complete the sentences with
words from the story .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs , filling the blanks
with suitable words from the story .
- Call on some Ss to read their complete
sentences aloud .
- Give feedback
<i><b>a. farmer b. died </b></i>
Work in groups
Read their predictions
Listen and check their
predictions .
Read their results and
correct the false ones .
Work in pairs to practice
Work in pairs to complete
the sentences
Read their complete
sentences .
Listen and copy .
Work in pairs to retell the
story in details .
<i><b>c. used d. marry / choose </b></i>
<i><b>e. clothes f. lost </b></i>
* Post - reading : (4’)
Retell the story
- Have Ss work in pairs , telling the story again
in details ( They can look at the statements in
the gap filling exercise and add more )
- Call on some Ss to retell the story in front of
class .
- Correct mistakes if any
* Homework : (1’)
1. Rewrite the story .
2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .
Listen and copy .
<b></b>
<b> </b>
<b>- Week: 9</b>
<i><b>- Period: 25</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 12/10/2011</b>
<b>Aim: writing a short story</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use simple </b>
past tense to write a folk tale
<b>Teaching aids: Text book </b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to repeat the main of story “the lost shoes”
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Addin</b>
<b>g</b>
<i>Warm-up:</i> (chatting) ( 5’)
A Pupil tell the tale “The Lost Shoe”
in front of the class.
<i><b>* Pre-Writing: (10’)</b></i>
<b>Read</b>
<i><b>How the Tiger got his stripes.</b></i>
1. Complete the story. Use the verbs in the
box.
(1) :appeared/
came
(2) : was
(3) : said
(4) : left
(5) : went
(6) tied
(7) : lit
<b>buffalo: con trâu</b>
<b>graze: gm c</b>
<b>servant: ầy t</b>
<b>master: ông ch</b>
<b>wisdom: trí kh«n, sự th«ng minh</b>
<b>straw: rơm, rạ</b>
<b>escape: trèn thốt</b>
<b>stripes: vết vằn</b>
<b>burn: cháy </b>
<b>lit: ch©m ( thắp) lử</b>
* While-Writing (15’)
<i>2. Now imagine you the man. Use the</i>
<i>words to write the story. Start like</i>
<i>this:</i>
<i><b> One day I was in the fill and my </b></i>
<i><b>buffalo grazed nearby, a tiger </b></i>
<i><b>appeared. The tiger asked why the </b></i>
<i><b>strong buffalo was my servant and I</b></i>
<i><b>was it’s master. I told the tiger that </b></i>
<i><b>I had the something called wisdom. </b></i>
Retell the story “ The lost shoe”
- T asks a student to retell the story
“Trí khơn của ta đây” in Vietnamese.
- T asks: <i>Do you know why tigers have</i>
<i>black stripes?</i>
<i>Which story tells you about that?</i>
<i>In this lesson, we will learn more about</i>
<i>this story .Firstly, you read the story</i>
<i>and complete it by filling the verbs in</i>
<i>the correct blank.</i>
- SS read the story and fill the verbs in
the blank.
- SS compare the answers with a
partner.
- Some SS read out the completed
story.
- T gives the correct answers.
- T guides: <i>Imagine that you are the</i>
<i>farmer. Use the words to write the</i>
<i>story. Start like this: </i>One day I was in
the fill and ...
- SS listen carefully and write
individually in 5 minutes.
- SS correct the mistakes in pairs
- Some SS read out the story.
- T gives the elicited answer.
- SS copy.
- T guides SS to retell the story without
the book.
<i><b>that I said was my wisdom and I </b></i>
<i><b>burned the tiger. The tiger escaped, </b></i>
<i><b>but today it still has black stripes </b></i>
<i><b>from the burns.</b></i>
<i><b>* Post-writing: (3’)</b></i>
- Retell the story.
- Write a story about you which
happen last week.
<i><b>* Homework: (2’)</b></i>
. - Prepare new lesson: Language
focus.
- The others give their remarks.
- T corrects.
<b>---</b><sub> </sub>
<b>- Week: 9</b>
<i><b>- Period: 26</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 14/10/2011</b>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Further practice in prepositions of time and “used to”</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use </b>
prepositions of time and “used to” (to talk about the action which
always happens in the past)
<b>Teaching aids: Text book </b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to retell the story about you which happen last
week.
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Addin</b>
<b>g</b>
<i><b>Warm-up: </b><b> (Matching). (5’)</b></i>
<i><b>A</b></i> <i><b>B</b></i> <i><b>Key</b></i>
1. In a. January 1.a / d
2. On b. 3 p m 2. c /
e
3.At c. Wednesday 3. b /
- give instructions
- play game
f
4. Between d. November
1997
4. f
5. After /
Before
e. July 2nd <sub>5. b</sub>
f. 7 a m and
9 am
<i><b>* Language focus: </b></i>
<b>1. Write the past simple form of</b>
<b>each verbs: ( 6’)</b>
<b>a.</b> run - ran
<b>b.</b> fly - flew
<b>c.</b> take - took
<b>d.</b> go - went
<b>e.</b> have - has
<b>f.</b> do - did
<b>g.</b> be -was/ were
<b>h.</b> ride - rode
<b>i.</b> eat - ate
<b>j.</b> sit - sat
<b>k.</b> come- came
<b>2. Complete the dialogue below. ( 8’)</b>
<b> Use the past simple:</b>
a-Lan: Did you eat rice for breakfast?
-Nga: No. I ate noodles.
b- Ba: How did you get to school?
- Nam: I took a bus to school.
c- Minh: Where was you last night?
- Hoa: I was at home.
d- Chi: Which subject did you have
yesterday?
-Ba: I have Literature.
<b>3. Complete the sentences. Use the</b>
<b>prepositions in the table. ( 6’)</b>
a. On b. in c. between
d. at ... after e. before
*Note:
in + month, year, seasons On + date
( on 17th<sub>)</sub>
On + day, date of a month.
Activity 1:
-T writes some verbs on the board.
-SS find out the irregular verbs in the
-Some SS write the verbs on the
board.
-T corrects the mistakes.
-T gives some verbs to SS.
-T asks SS to look at past 2 and guide
SS to do exercise.(Now in order to
<i><b>review the usage and structure of the</b></i>
<i><b>past simple tense, you work in pairs,</b></i>
<i><b>complete the small dialogues ).</b></i>
-SS work in pairs.
-Some pairs of SS practice before
class.
-T corrects and gives the answer key.
Activity 2:
-T asks SS to use the prepositions in
the table to complete the sentences.
-SS do exercise.
- Some SS speak before the class.
-T gives the correct answer.
-T emphasis.
-SS copy and notice.
Activity 3:
-T guides SS to repeat the structure
and usage of USED TO.
-SS repeat and write on the board.
-T corrects the mistakes.
At + time (at 7 pm).
<b>4. Look at the pictures. Complete the</b>
<b>dialogue. ( 7’)</b>
<b> Use used to and the verbs in the</b>
<b>box.</b>
(+) S +used to +V infinitive.
(-)S + didn’t use to + V infinitive
* Used to diễn tả HĐ thường xuyên
<i><b>hoặc đã từng xảy ra trong quá khứ va</b></i>
<i><b>ko còn ở hiện tại.</b></i>
(1) I used to have long hair.
(2) She used to be my next-door
neighbor.
They used to live in Hue , too.
<i><b>Homework:</b><b> ( 3’)</b></i>
- Write twenty irregular verbs on
the notebooks
- prepare new lesson: Unit
5-Getting started + listen and read.
-T asks SS to complete the dialogue.
-SS work in pairs.
-Some pairs of SS practice aloud
before class.
-T gives the answer key.
the prepositions of time.
- listen and copy
<i><b>- Period: 27</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 16/10/2011</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: </b></i>
<b>Aim: Reading the dialogue for details</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand</b>
dialogue between Tim and his mom about his study
<b>Teaching aids: Text book </b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write twenty irregular verbs on the board
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm-up:</i> (Network) <i>(<b>5’)</b></i>
Chemistry Math
Geography
History
<i>Pre- reading:</i> (chatting) (15’)
- What subject are you good at?
bad at?
<i><b>Pre – teach vocabulary:</b></i>
- a report card (n): phiếu b¸o im
- pronunciation (n): cách phát âm
- (to) improve (v): nâng cao
a. Tim was out when his mother
called him
b. Tim’ mother meet his teacher
at school
c. Tim’s report is poor
d. Tim needs to improve his
Spanish grammar
e. Tim promised to try his best in
learning Spanish
<i>While - reading: <b>(10’)</b></i>
- Ask students to write as many
subjects as they can on the
blackboard
- Write the subjects they have
studied at school
- Ask questions
- Listen and answer the questions
- Present new words on the board
- Listen and repeat
- Copy down
- Guide Ss to read new words in
chorus
- Listen and repeat in chorus
- Checking: Rub out and remember
- Call out the English words
- Present the sentences on the board
- Read the sentences given and
predict which is true and which is
false
- give feedback
Read the dialogue
Check their prediction and
correct the false statements
Answer the questions:
a. Who is Miss Jackson?
b. What did Miss Jackson give
Tim’s mother?
c. How did Tim study this
semester?
d. What did Miss Jackson say
Tim should do?
e. What did Tim’s mother give
him at the end of the
conversation?
<i>Post - reading: <b>(3’)</b></i>
Survey:
Name What subject
Mai literature
Ex: What subject do you need to
improve?
<i><b>* Homework: (2’)</b></i>
Asking students prepare school report
in last year.
<i><b>a.F b.F c. F d.T e.T</b></i>
- read the dialogue and check their
prediction – correct the false
statements
- give feed back
<i><b>a. She is Tim</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s teacher . </sub></b></i>
<i><b>b. She gave Tim</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s mother his </sub></b></i>
<i><b>report card . </b></i>
<i><b>c. He worked really hard . </b></i>
<i><b>d. She said Tim should work </b></i>
<i><b>harder on his Spanish </b></i>
<i><b>pronunciation .</b></i>
<i><b>e. She gave him a dictionary </b></i>
- Ask Ss to answer the questions
- go around the class and help weak
students
- Practise asking and answering the
questions
- Interview their friends
- listen and write
<b>- Week: 10</b>
<i><b>- Period: 28</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 20/10/2011</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: </b></i>
<b>Aim: Practising speaking and listening</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about </b>
their study habits and to listen for specific information to fill in a report
card
<b>Teaching aids: Text book , poster</b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (5’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to talk about school report in last year.
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Addin</b>
<b>g</b>
<b>* Warm up : (5’)</b>
<b>Brainstorming</b>
- Ask Ss to write their ideas on the blackboard .
* Possible answers :
- Speak English to friends in class
- Watch English TV
- Do grammar exercises
- Read English stories
- Read English newspapers / magazines
- Listen to the English radio program
<i><b>* Pre - speaking : (5’)</b></i>
- Introduce the topic of the speaking .
- Call on some Ss to read the possible answers
above and copy down .
- Have Ss read the questions and words in the
<i><b>* While – speaking: (5’)</b></i>
* Model :
Lan said she did her homework after
<i><b>dinner</b></i>
<i><b> He / she said ………</b></i>
- Call on some pairs to read the model
- Ask Ss to work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class.
- Correct mistakes if any .
<i><b>* Post - speaking ( 3’)</b></i>
- Ask Ss to write with information above .
Eg : Lan ,<sub>s elder brother helps him with his </sub>
Work in groups to play
games .
Read all the ways of
improving English .
Copy in their notebooks .
Listen and read the model ,
Work in pairs
Practice in front of class.
Work individually .
Read their writings
homework .
- Call on some Ss to read their writings .
* Pre - listening : ( 5’)
Introduce the topic of the listening and some new
words :
1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- behavior (n) = c¸ch cư sử
- A participant (n) = người tham gia
- Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (a) = thỏa đ¸ng
- cooperation (n) = hợp t¸c
- attendance (n) = sự có mặt
- to appreciate = đ¸nh gi¸ cao
* Checking : What and where
2. Prediction : ( 5’)
- Ask Ss to look at Nga,<sub>s report and predict the </sub>
missing information and then compare with their
partners .
a. day present (1)
b. Day absent (2)
c. Behavior – participant (3)
d. Listening (4)
e. Speaking (5)
f. Reading (6)
g. Writing (7)
- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board .
* While - listening<i><b>( 5’)</b></i>
1. Listen :
- Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their
prediction .
- Call on Ss to read their results and give feedback
1. 87 days present
2. 5 days absent
3. participation : Spanish pronunciation
4. Listening : Comprehension
5. Speaking : A
6 . Reading : A 7 . Writing : B
2. Comprehension questions :
- Ask Ss to answer some questions about Nga,<sub>s </sub>
report card .
1. Who are Nga,<sub>s parents ?</sub>
2. What is Nga,<sub>s teacher</sub>,<sub>s name ? </sub>
3. What subject was reported ? For what term ?
4. What are the comments ?
5. What does S stand for ? What about F UA B
CD ?
Listen and repeat in chorus
and individually .
Copy down .
Play game
Predict and compare with
their partners .
Report their predictions .
Listen to the tape and check
their predictions
Read their results .
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and work in
pairs to answer the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback .
* Post - listening : (3’) Survey
Questions You Your
partn
er
1. When do you do your
homework ?
2. Who helps you with your
homework ?
3. How much time do you spend on
Maths / English / History / Literature
?
4. Which subject do you need to
improve ?
5. What do you do to improve your
English?
- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking their partners
questions and taking notes of the answers .
- Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 0r 5 to report what
they have known about their partners,<sub> study . </sub>
- Correct mistakes if any .
<i><b>*Homework (1’)</b></i>
<i><b> Write something about your partners</b><b>,</b><b><sub> study </sub></b></i>
<i><b>habits </b></i>
Eg : Lan is my best friend . She works very
hard and always get good grades . she usually
does her homework after school
Practice asking and
answering the questions and
report their survey .
Listen and copy .
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
<b></b>
<b>--- Week: 10</b>
<i><b>- Period: 29</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 22/10/2011</b>
<b> </b>
<b> </b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand</b>
the text and get specific information
<b>Teaching aids: Text book </b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write something about your partners,<sub> study </sub>
habits on board.
Eg : <i>Lan is my best friend . She works very hard and always get good grades . she usually</i>
<i>does her homework after school</i>
<b>Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm-up:</i> (chatting) (5’)
- Do you like learning English?
- How many new words do you
try to learn a day?
- What do you do when you
read a new words?
- How do you learn new words?
<i>Pre - reading: <b>(9’)</b></i>
<i><b>Pre – teach vocabulary</b></i>
- mother tongue(n): tiếng mẹ đẻ
- (to) underline(v): gạch ch©n
- (to) highlight( v): làm nổi bật
- (to) come across(v): bắt gặp
- (to) stick(v): d¸n
<i>While - reading<b>:</b> <b> (15’)</b></i>
a. All language learners write
the meaning of new words
in their mother tongue
b. Some learners write
examples of words they
want to learn
c. Every learners tries to learn
all new words they come
across
d. Many learners only learn
new words that are
important
* Reading :
2. Comprehension questions
- Have Ss work in pairs to answer
the questions
- Ask some question
- Answer the questions
- Present new words on the board
- Listen and repeat
- copy down
- Guide Ss to read them in chorus
- read new words in chorus
- Use the technique “Slap the board
to check”
- Read the statements and predict
which is true and which is false
- Read the text and check their
prediction
- give instruction
- give feedback
<i><b>a. F b. T c . F d . T</b></i>
- Call on 2 or 3 Ss to read the
passage aloud .
- Give feedback
- Call on some Pairs to practice
asking and answering the questions
Answer the questions:
<i>Post - reading: <b>(5’)</b></i>
Survey
<b>Ways of </b>
<b>learning words </b>
<b>Lan Hoa ...</b>
1. Make a list of
words , their
meanings and
learn them by
heart .
2. Write sample
sentences with
new words
3. Stick new
words somewhere
in the house .
4. Underline or
highlight the
words .
5. Read stories in
English
6. Learn words
through songs .
- Call on Ss to report about their
groups .
Ex : Lan learns words by making a
list of words
<i>Homework<b>(1’)</b></i>
1. Write the ways of learning words
that you think are the best for you .
2. Prepare the next lesson .
ways .
b. Because they help them to
remember the use of new words .
c. They write examples , put the
words and their meanings on
stickers , underline or highlight
them .
d. They may think they can not do
so . Instead , they learn only
important words
e. Revision is necessary in learning
words .
f. Learners should try different
ways of learning words t find out
what is the best
- Practise asking and answering the
questions
- give the correct answers
Work in groups .
Copy down
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
<b></b>
<b>--- Week: 10</b>
<i><b>- Period: 30</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 24/10/2011</b>
<b>Aim: Writing letters to friends.</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know the </b>
format of a letter and practice writing a letter to a friend
<b>Teaching aids: Text book – poster.</b>
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (6’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write the ways of learning words that you
think are the best for you
<b> Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm-up</i><b>:</b><i> </i><b> (3’)</b> Chatting
1. Have you ever written to someone ?
2. To whom do you usually write ?
3. What do you often write about ?
- Lead in new lesson .
<i>Prewriting: <b>(15’)</b></i>
Introduce the topic of the writing and some
new words to Ss .
1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- Lunar (n): ©m lịch
- Enjoyable (adj ) = vui thó , thÝch thó
- to celebrate = tỉ chøc kỉ niệm
-> celebration (n) bi lƠ tỉ chøc kØ niÖm
* Checking : Rub out and remember
2. Ordering
- Ask Ss to put the parts of the letter in the
Play game
Listen and copy down
Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .
correct order .
a. Opening d. Body of the letter
b. Closing e. Signature
c. The date f . Writer,<sub>s address .</sub>
- Give feedback:
1-f 2-c 3-a 4-d 5-b 6-e
- Ask Ss to read the letter to check their order .
3. Labeling
- Ask Ss to label each section with the correct
letter .
4 . Comprehension questions
- Have Ss work in pairs and answer some
questions
a. Who wrote the letter ? To whom ?
b. What are there in the heading ?
c. What is the main part of the letter ?
d. What did Hoa receive a few days ago ?
e. What subject is Hoa good at ?
f. Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar
New Year Festival ?
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering in front of class .
<i>While - writing: <b>(14’)</b></i>
- Ask Ss to imagine that they are Lan and write
a letter to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco ,
using the given information .
- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings
in front of class .
* Suggested letter :
<i>15 Quang Trung street </i>
<i>Hanoi , July 12 th , 2005 </i>
<i>Dear Donna </i>
<i>Thanks for your letter . I am glad to hear you </i>
<i>had an interesting Mother,<sub>s Day .</sub></i>
<i>We have received our second semester report </i>
<i>last month . I got good grades for Geography , </i>
<i>Physics and Math but my English and History </i>
<i>results were poor . My teacher advises me to </i>
<i>improve English and History . I think I have to</i>
<i>study harder next school year . </i>
<i>In a few weeks , we are going to celebrate the </i>
<i>mid Autumn festival . That is an Autumn moon </i>
Do the exercise individually .
Read and check .
Label each section with the
correct letter .
Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering the
questions .
<i>postcard from there . </i>
<i>Write soon and tell me all your news . </i>
<i>Best </i>
<i>Lan ,</i>
<i>Post - writing:</i> (3’) Correction
- Call on Ss to read aloud their letters and
correct the mistakes .
<i>Homework<b>:</b> <b> (1’)</b></i>
Write a letter to your friend to tell him or
Read their letters aloud .
Copy down .
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
<b></b>
<b>--- Week: 11</b>
<i><b>- Period: 31</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 26/10/2011</b>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Further practice adverb of manner and the modal should.</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use </b>
adverbs of manner and modal should as an advice, reported speech with
<b>Teaching aids: Text book.</b>
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (3’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (6’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to read a letter to your friend to tell him or her
about your second semester report and about your summer holiday.
<b> Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Adding</b>
<b>I / Warm up : (5’) Pelmanism</b>
good warm bad fast badly
rode eat ate sit sat
- Explain the meanings and uses of them
+ Hard (a) and hard ( adv ) have different
meanings
<i><b>* Presentation (25’)</b></i>
1. Adverbs of manner .
- Setting the scene “ Use any word from the
game Pelmanism to complete the following
sentences “
* Form : S + V + a / an + adjective + noun
or : S + be + Adjective
S + V + adverb
* Use : Adj modifies the noun after it / the
subject
Adv modifies the verb of the
sentence .
<i>Exercise 1 / 52</i> : Complete the dialogues
- Ask Ss to work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front
of class
- Give feedback .
<i>1. hard 2. fast 3. badly 4. softly</i>
- Ask ss to practice the dialogue in open
pairs .
2. Modal : Should
- Ask Ss to look at Mr Hao,<sub>s house and </sub>
answer some questions
a. Is his house new ?
b. Is the wall discolored ?
c. How is the door ?
d. Is there grass in his garden ?
e. Should Mr Hao repair the roof ?
Suggested answers :
a. No , it isn,<sub>t b. Yes , it is c. It is broken</sub>
d. Yes. There is lots of grass in his garden.
e. Yes, he should .
-> Explain the modal “ Should “
+ Form : S + Should + infinitive
+ Use : give advice
+ Meaning : nen ( lam gi )
<i>Exercise 2 / 52 </i>
Give Ss the question “ What should he do
Play games
Listen and copy down
Work in pairs
Demonstrate in front of
class .
Practice asking and
answering the questions .
Listen and give examples .
with his house ?
mend ? / paint ? / replant ? / cut ? /
repair ?
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to use the verbs to
advise Mr Hao what to do .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the question “ What should he do
with his house ? “
- Give feedback .
a. Mr Hao should repair the roof .
b…………...paint the house
c. ………...cut the grass .
3. Commands , requests in reported
<b>speech </b>
- Explain the form of the reported speech :
* Form :
<b>To ask / tell + someone + to do something</b>
+ Example :
a. “ Can you give Tim this dictionary ? “
=> Mr Jackson asked me to give you this
dictionary
b. “ Please give Tim this dictionary . “
=> Miss Jackson told me to give you this
dictionary
<i>Exercise 3 / 53</i> : Explain the situation to Ss
- Have Ss work in pairs to do exercise .
- Call on some pairs to read their answers
aloud , then go to the board to write them
on .
- Give feedback
a. Miss Jackson asked me to wait for her
outside her office .
b. Miss Jackson told me to give you your
report card for this semester .
c. Miss Jackson asked me to help you with
your Spanish pronunciation .
d. Miss Jackson told me to meet her next
week
- Call on some Ss to practice is pairs and
correct their pronunciations .
4. Advice in reported speech
- Explain the form of it
* Form : S + said ( that ) + S + should + V
<b>...</b>
Example : Miss Jackson said , “ Tim should
Practice in pairs in front of
class .
Listen and copy .
Read the examples aloud .
Work in pairs
Practice in front of class .
Some Ss come to the board
to write them on
Copy and read the
examples aloud .
work harder on his Spanish pronunciation .
“
=> Miss Jackson said you should work
harder on your Spanish pronunciation .
<i>Exercise 4 / 53 </i>
- Ask Ss to work with their partners .
- Call on some Ss to practice in pairs and
correct pronunciation .
- Give feedback
a. Miss Jackson said you should spend
more time on Spanish pronunciation .
b. Miss Jackson said you should practice
speaking Spanish every day .
c . Miss Jackson said you should listen to
Spanish conversation on TV .
d. Miss Jackson you should practice reading
aloud passage in Spanish .
e. Miss Jackson said you should use this
dictionary to find out how to pronounce
Spanish words .
<i><b>* Consolidation: (3’)</b></i>
Repeat the structures in the lesson again
<i><b>* Homework : (2’)</b></i>
1. Review command , requests and advice
in Reported Speech .
2. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks.
3. Prepare the next lesson .
Practice in closed pairs and
open pairs .
listen and repeat
listen and copy .
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 11</b>
<i><b>- Period: 32</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 29/10/2011</b>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Reading for details and practice in gerunds.</b>
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand</b>
the dialogue and practice in gerunds used after some verbs: love, live,
hate, enjoy.
<b>Teaching aids: Text book.</b>
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (2’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to repeat command , requests and advice in
Reported Speech .
<b> Ss: answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’ activities</b> <b>Addi</b>
<b>ng</b>
<i><b>* Warm-up: (Brainstorming)(5’)</b></i>
<i><b>Presentation:</b><b> ( 25’)</b></i>
<b>I. Getting started:</b>
<i><b>New words:</b></i>
<b>Helping blind people: giúp đỡ những</b>
người mù.
<b>Helping elderly people: giúp đỡ </b>
người già.
<b>Helping handicapped children: giúp</b>
đỡ trẻ em tàn tật.
<b>Cleaning up the neighborhood: làm</b>
sạch khu dân cư.
<b>Taking part in cultural activities/ art</b>
<b>club:</b>
tham gia các hoạt đéng văn hoá/ CLB
mĩ thuật.
<b>Summer campaign: chiến dịch mùa</b>
hè.
<b>II. Listen and read:</b>
<b>1. Practice the dialogue with a</b>
- Present new words and guide Ss to
read them in chorus.
- Say the activities of th- Listen and
repeat - Copy down.
<b>-T guides: </b> <i>In Vietnam, which</i>
<i>organizations are there for young?</i>
<i>What can we do when we enroll these</i>
<i>organizations? Are these activities</i>
<i>useful for you and the general</i>
<i>public?</i>
-SS answer.
-T gives the meaning of new words.
-T asks more some questions.
<i>Which activity do you like best?</i>
<i>Why?</i>
<i>Do you plan to take part in any</i>
<i>activities this summer?</i>
-T guides: <i>This summer Nga enrolls</i>
<i>Now you listen to the tape for the first</i>
Collecthelp blind
Waste people
paper The Y & Y
<b>partner.</b>
<b>Enroll: đăng ký học/ tham gia.</b>
<b>application form: đơn xin tham gia</b>
<b>Fill out: điền thông tin.</b>
<b>Outdoor activities: các hoạt đéng</b>
ngoài trời.
<b>acting: diễn kịch</b>
1. <b>Complete Nga’s details .</b>
Name: Pham Mai Nga
Home address: 5 Tran Phu Steet.
Phone number: Not available
Date of birth: April 22, 1989
Sex: Female.
Interests: drawing, out door activities
<i><b>Consolidation:( 4’)</b></i>
<i>What’s her name?</i>
<i>Where does she live?</i>
<i>What</i>’s <i>her phone number?</i>
<i>When was she born? What is her date</i>
<i>of birth?</i>
<i>What are her hobbies?</i>
<i><b>Homework:( 2’)</b></i>
1. Write about their friend,<sub>s hobbies</sub>
.
2. Prepare the next lesson .
<i>time between Nga and the secretary</i>
<i>.Is your guess right? What</i>
<i>information does Nga give the</i>
<i>secretary?</i>
-T plays the tape.
-SS listen carefully and find out new
-T gives the meaning.
-T asks SS to practice.
-SS work in pairs.
-Some pairs of SS practice aloud
before class.
-T corrects the mistakes of
pronunciation.
-T guides SS to do exercise 2.
<i>Now you look at the form and</i>
<i>complete Nga</i>’s<i> details.</i>
-SS work in pairs.
-SS ask and answer in pairs.
-T corrects the mistakes.
-SS: listen and copy
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 11</b>
<i><b>- Period: 33</b></i> <b> </b>
<b> </b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Speak – Listen</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Listening for details and practicing speaking when offering </b>
assistance.
<b>Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to complete a </b>
song and offer and respond to assistance
<b>Teaching aids: Text book.</b>
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ORDER : (2’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (5’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write about their friend,<sub>s hobbies on black </sub>
board , or call a student to read the dialogue again, write vocabulary.
<b> Ss: Answer in front of the class</b>
<b> 3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Adding</b>
<b>Warm up : Shark</b><i><b>,</b><b> s attack (4’)</b></i>
- Cut out a shark and a school girl / boy from
card
- Draw some steps , then stick the cut out
girl / boy on the top of the steps , the sharks in
the sea .
- Draw 5 gaps for the word – favor
<b>*Presentation:</b>
<b>Pre – speaking: (5’)</b>
- Ask Ss the meanings of the word FAVOR
+ What do you say to ask for a favor ?
Can you help me ?
Could you do me a favor ?
Can / Could you ………..?
+ When do you ask for favor ?
Need some help
+ How do you say to respond to favor ?
Certainly / Of course / sure
No problem
+ What does the receptionist say ?
May I help you ?
+ What is for ?
For offering assistance
+ another way to offer assistance ?
Do you need any help ? / Let me help you .
+ How do you say to respond to assistance ?
Yes . No , thank you .
<b>While – speaking: ( 7’)</b>
<b>Play game</b>
Listen and practice asking
and answering the
questions
Listen and copy
Repeat chorally ,
individually
- Ask Ss to copy down the following phrases
<b>Asking for</b>
<b>favor</b>
<b>Responding for favor</b>
* Can / Could
you help me
please ?
* Could you do
me a favor ?
* I need a favor
* Can / could
you ..?
* Certainly / of course /
sure
* No problem
* What can I do for
you ?
* How can I help you ?
* I am sorry . I am really
busy
<b>Offering </b>
<b>assistance </b>
<b>Responding to </b>
<b>assistance </b>
* May I help
you ?
* Do you need
any help ?
* Let me help
you .
* Yes / No . Thank you
* Yes . That is very kind
of you .
* No . thank you . I am
fine .
I can
manage
- Ask Ss to repeat chorally and then
individually all the phrases in the chart .
<b>Practice : </b>
1. Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogues
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
class .
- Correct pronunciation if any .
2. Use appropriate phrases to make similar
dialogues about some of the following
situations with a partner.
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
class .
- Give feedback
<b>* Post – speaking: (5’)</b>
<b>Situation : </b>
A receptionist wants to help a tourist who
needs to go to the nearest bank
<b>Receptionist : ………?</b>
<b>Tourist : yes . Can you ………..?</b>
<b>Receptionist : Sure . Turn right when you get</b>
out of the hotel . Turn left at the first
corner .
………... your right .
Work in pairs
Closed pairs
Practice the dialogues in
front of class
Listen and copy .
Listen and copy down
Work in groups to guess
the missing words in the
song .
<b>Tourist :………</b>
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make the
dialogue and move around the class and help
Ss .
- Call on some Ss to practice the dialogue in
front of the class .
<b>* LISTENING:</b>
<b>Pre - listening : ( 6’)</b>
Introduce the topic of the listening and
some new words to Ss .
1. Pre – teach vocabulary
- to unite = đoàn kết, hợp nhất
- peace (n) >< war (n) hòa bình >< chiến
tranh
2. Guess the missing words
- Ask Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps
in the song
- Get them to share with their partners and
report their predictions .Then write them on
the board .
<b>While - listening : (7’)</b>
- Turn on the tape 3 times and ask Ss to check
their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to read their results
- Give feedback
<i>Children of our land <b>unite </b></i>
<i>Let,<sub>s sing for </sub><b><sub>peace ,</sub></b></i>
<i>Let,<sub>s sing for</sub><b><sub> right</sub></b><sub> .</sub></i>
<i>Let,<sub>s sing for the </sub><b><sub>love</sub></b><sub> between </sub><b><sub>north</sub></b><sub> and </sub></i>
<i><b>south</b> , </i>
<i>Oh, children <b>of </b>our land , unite .</i>
<i>Children of the <b>world</b> hold hands .</i>
<i>Let,<sub>s </sub><b><sub>show</sub></b><sub> our love from </sub><b><sub>place </sub></b><sub>to place .</sub></i>
<i>Let,<sub>s shout </sub><b><sub>out</sub></b><sub> loud ,</sub></i>
<i>Let,<sub>s make a </sub><b><sub>stand</sub></b><sub> ,</sub></i>
<i>Oh , children of the <b>world </b>, hold hands . </i>
-Turn on the tape once more to check the
results again .
<b>Post - listening : (3’)</b>
- Ask Ss to work in groups to learn how to
sing the song
+ Ss listen to the tape and repeat in chorally .
- Call on some Ss from each groups to sing a
song.
<b>Homework : ( 1’)</b>
1. Copy down the completed song .
Listen to the tape and
check their predictions
Read their answers .
Listen and check the
results again .
Learn how to sing
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 12</b>
<i><b>- Period: 34</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date:</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: </b></i>
<b>Aims: Reading comprehension the passage about the Boy Scout of </b>
America.
<b>Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know </b>
more about youth organization – The Boy Scouts of America (BSA)
<b>Teaching aids: Text book, poster</b>
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ORDER : (2’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (5’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to read the song and write vocabulary
<b> Ss: Answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Adding</b>
<i><b>Warm – up:</b><b> (Jumbled words) (5’)</b></i>
1. Racchtaer 4. Pexailn
2. Iojn 5. Nessmsibuan
3. Mai 6. Thauolgh
<i><b>Pre- reading:</b><b> (10’)</b></i>
Introduce the topic of the reading passage and
some new words to Ss .
1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- to encourage : give the verb which means to
give Sb support
- Citizenship (n) = quyền công dân
- coeducational (a) ( translation )
- Voluntary (a) = tự ý, tự nguyện
- to lead – led – led
- to establish = to start / to create an
organization
* Checking : Slap the board
- Write the words whose
letters are in discover
- Rewrite the words in the
correct forms
Listen and copy
Repeat chorally ,
individually .
2. T /F Statements prediction
- Stick the poster with the statements on the
blackboard and guess which is true , which is
a. The Boy Scout of America is a youth
organization
b. Scouting began in America
c. William Boyce is a businessman in London
d. Boys and girls can join BSA
e. The Scouting Association is the biggest
voluntary youth organization in the world .
- Call on Ss to report their predictions and
write them on the board
<i><b>While - reading : ( 13’)</b></i>
1. Reading :
- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their
books at the same time to read the passage to
check their predictions
- Call on some Ss to read their results aloud
and give feedback :
a. T b. F c. F d. F e. T
- Have them correct false statements .
b. Scout began in England
c. William Boysce is an American business
d. BSA is mainly for boys .
- Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud .
- Correct mistakes if any .
2. Fill in the missing dates
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do exercise 1 / 57
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front
of class
- Give feedback : a.1907 b. 1909 c. 1910 d.
1994
3. Answer :
- Have Ss work in pairs to practice asking
answering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class
- Give feedback
<i>a. Scouting began in England in 1907 </i>
<i>b. The meeting between a boy scout and Mr </i>
<i>William Boyce led the Scouts Association </i>
<i>crossing the Atlantic in 1910 .</i>
<i>c. Girls can join in the Girls Guides </i>
<i>Association and Camp Fire Boys and girls .</i>
<i>d. They are building characters , good </i>
Work in groups to predict .
Report their predictions
Listen to the tape and read
the passage to check their
predictions
Read their results .
Correct the false statements
Read the passage aloud .
Work in pairs to do the
exercise
Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering the
questions .
<i>citizenship and personal fitness .</i>
* Post - reading<i> :</i> (7’)
Interview a member of the Boys Scouts of
American
- Call on an excellent student in class to
practice with the teacher .
- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs
<b>Interview</b> <b>Member of BSA</b>
1. When did
scouting begin ?
2. When were the
aims established ?
3. Can a girl join
the BSA ?
4 . How many
members does the
Scouting
Association have
now ?
5. Is it the largest
voluntary Youth
Organization in
the world ?
- In 1907 in England
established in 1907 .
They are building the
characters , good
citizenship and
personal fitness .
- No , It is mainly for
boys but girls can join
similar organization
such as the Girl Guides
Association or the
Coeducational Camp
fire Boys and Girls .
Over 25 million
- Yes, Of course
* Homework<i> :</i> (2’)
1. Learn by heart new words and write the
summary of the BSA
2. Prepare the next lesson
Listen and copy
<b>Experience: </b>
………
<b>- Week: 12</b>
<i><b>- Period: 35</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 3/11/2011</b>
<i><b>Lesson 4: </b></i>
<b>Aims: Writing a letter.</b>
<b>Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a </b>
letter about a future plan using “be going to”
<b>Teaching aids: Text book.</b>
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ORDER : (2’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (5’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write the summary of the BSA on board
<b> Ss: Answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T’s activities & Ss’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Adding</b>
<i>Warm – up:</i> (Revision) (5’)
<b>Revision of the structure Be going to </b>
- Ask Ss the usage of “ be going to “ – to express a
future plan .
- Get Ss to make the sentence :
“ I am going to + Verb “ ( The verbs have to begin
with a letter from A to Z
Ex: T : I am going to accept their invitation .
S1 : I am going to buy a new bicycle
S2 : I am going to clean the floor .
S3 : I am going to dust the furniture .
<i>* </i><b>Pre - Writing: ( 8’)</b>
Pre – teach vocabulary
<b>- help the community: giúp đỡ cộng đồng</b>
<b>- encourage: động viên, khuyến khích</b>
<b>- participate: tham gia</b>
<b>- recycling program: chương trình tái chế nguyên</b>
<b>- collect glass: thu gom thuỷ tinh</b>
<b>- save natural resources: bảo vệ nguồn tài</b>
nguyên thiên nhiên
<b>- raise fun for the poor: gây quĩ cho người nghèo </b>
<b>- help the street children: giúp đỡ trẻ em đường</b>
phố
- Ask Ss the usage of
“be going to”
- Answer
<b>- plant trees and flowers: trồng cây và hoa </b>
<b>- register: đăng ký</b>
<b>2. Reading the notice (5’)</b>
- Ask Ss to read the notice “ To : All Y and Y
members of the school “
- Ask some questions to check their understanding
a. What do members of the Y and Y have to do in
the recycling program ?
b. What is the purpose of the recycling program ?
c. What other programs can members of the Y and
- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Give feedback and ask them to practice in open
pairs .
3. Complete the letter (5”)
- Ask some questions to set the scene :
* Who writes the letter ? ( Nga )
* To whom does Nga write ? ( Linh )
* Is Nga a member of Y and Y ? ( Yes )
* What does Nga write to Linh about ? ( She
writes about the programs of her school Y and Y
that she is going to participate )
- Get Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the
letter
- Give feedback :1. community 2.recycling
3.collect
4. send 5. recycling 6. save 7. raise / earn
8. participating 9. planting 10 . helping
- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter and
correct mistakes if any .
4. Reading the dialogue : (3’)
- Set the scene “ Hoa talks to her aunt about the Y
and Y Green Group , about the activities that she
is going to do .”
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her
aunt .
* Checking : some questions :
a. Why does Hoa look happy ?
b. What is she going to do in the environment
month ?
c. What are they doing to earn money for their
school Y&Y ?
- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their answers in
front of the class .
* While - writing : ( 5’)
- Ask Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents
.
Read the notice and
answer the questions
Practice asking and
answering the
questions in pairs
Listen and answer
( the whole )
Work in pairs to
complete the letter .
Read the complete
letter .
Listen and copy .
Practice asking and
answering the
questions .
- Get Ss to work in group of 4 or 5 to write a letter
on poster .
- Move around the class and help then if they are
necessary .
* Post - writing : (5’)
- Choose four letters from 4 group and stick them
on the board
- Get the whole class to read the 4 letters and
correct them .
- Give feedback : Suggested letter
<i> Dear Mom and Dad , </i>
<i>I am very happy to tell you that I am able to join </i>
<i>in the Y & Y Green Group of my school . </i>
<i>The green Group is holding an environment month</i>
<i>plan . We are going to clean the lakes,<sub>banks on </sub></i>
<i>weekends . We are also going to plant trees and </i>
<i>flowers in the parks and water them every </i>
<i>afternoon after class . We are planting young trees</i>
<i>and plants to sell to other schools . </i>
<i>I hope that we can bring more green to the city </i>
<i>and earn some money for the school Y&Y . The </i>
<i>program is very interesting and useful , is not it ? </i>
<i>I am still in a very good health . I will tell you </i>
<i>more about the group activities later . </i>
<i>With love , </i>
Hoa .
<b>* Homework: (2’)</b>
- write a letter to your friends to tell about
things that did last summer.
Stick their letters on
the board and correct
its mistakes
Read the suggested
letter aloud
Listen and copy .
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
<b>- Week: 12</b>
<i><b>- Period: 36</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 5/11/2011</b>
<b>Lesson 5: </b>
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Introducing some activies of the Y & Y
* Objective: - By the end of the lesson, students wrill be able to use Simple Present
Tense to talk about future activities.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedure:
<b>1.CLASS ODER : (2’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and Checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write a letter to your friends to tell about
things that did last summer on board.
<b> Ss: Answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T's activties & Ss'</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Adding</b>
* Warm up : Brainstorming (5’)
<b> Possible answers : </b>
<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Clean up the streets </i>
<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Help elderly people </i>
<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Take part in sports</i>
<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Help handicappied / street children </i>
<b>-</b> <i>Collect and empty garbage</i> …..
* Presentation : (10’)
1. Present tense with future meaning
a. Pre – teach vocabulary
- a ret home : a place where old or sick people are
cared for
- an orphanage : a place where children without
parents live
- a stadium ( picture )
* Checking : Rub out and remember
b. Setting the scene : Introduce the dialogue “ Lan
and Mai are members of the Y&Y organization .
They are talking about the summer activity
program”
Lan : …(1…….we collect and empty garbage ?
Mai : at Dong Xuan Market .
Lan : …..(2)…….. we collect ……(3)………?
Mai : On January 9
Lan : ………(4)…….. we start and ……(5)…..?
Mai : ……..(6) …… 8 am and ……(7) … 5 pm .
dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to play the role of Lan and
mai to practice the dialogue .
<b>- Give feedback</b>
Play game
Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down
Play game
Listen carefully
1. where do 2. when do 3. an empty garbage
4. what time do 5. finish 6. we start at 7. finish at
c. Concept checking : (5’)
- Ask Ss some questions to check their
understanding
a. When do we “ where “ ?
b. When do we use “ when “ ?
c. When do we use “ what time “ ?
d. Is the date at present or in the future ?
e. What tense do we use in the dialogue ?
- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about
the Y&Y activity by using the following cues
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
- Give feedback
2. Gerunds : (6’)
* Form : Like , love , enjoy , hate + Ving
* Survey :
- Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask their
friends and stick on the chart .
- Give feedback by asking Ss to report their
friends,<sub> hobbies .</sub>
Eg : Ba loves playing soccer . He does not like
cooking and especially hate washing dishes . ..
3. Modals : may , can , could (6’)
- Ask Ss to repeat the uses of the offering
assistance , asking for favors and how to respond .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in
front of the class .
- Give feedback
a /A : Can you buy a ticket for me ?
B : Can you take me across the road ?
C : Could you help me with this math problem ?
D : Can you water the flowers in the garden?
b / A : May I help you ?
A : Do you need any help ?
B : Let me help you .
A : Yes . That is very kind of you .
- Ask them to practice the dialogue in front of the
class .
* Homework : (3’)
1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .
practice the dialogue
Practice asking and
answering to draw the
form
Copy down .
Practice asking and
answering the
questions about the
Y&Y activity .
Listen and copy .
Work in groups of
three or four
Report their results .
Repeat the uses of the
“ Asking for favors /
offering assistance
and how to respond “
Practice speaking the
dialogue
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 12</b>
<i><b>- Period: 37</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>- Preparing date: 9/11/2011</b>
- To revise all the knowledge that they have studied from the start of the new
year school.
- To prepare well for the test
<b>II.The teaching aids : </b>
- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, reference books,...
<b>III. The teaching procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ORDER : (2’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to talk about the structures in last lesson such as
: Gerunds, Modals, …..
<b> Ss: Answer in front of the class</b>
<b>3. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>Teacher’s and Students’ </b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>Contents</b> <b>Adding</b>
<b>* Warm up : (5’)</b>
- Holding the class in order and
- Call a pupil to give exanples
using <i>Used to</i>... and modal verbs
with <i>can, could</i>
<b> * Presentaion (30’)</b>
- Ss revise
- Work in groups to revise all the
- Go to the bb to write sentences.
+ I used to go to the movies when I lived
in Hanoi
+ I can play soccer
+ I could swim when I was ten
<b>past simple tense :</b>
<b>*”used to” to talk about habits in the </b>
<b>past</b>
Ex : I used to get up late
He used to smoke too much
knowledge
- Ss repeat how to form adverbs
of manner
- Ss talk the aims of some
modals
- Ss distinguish three types of
sentence: Commands, requests,
and advice
- Ss take notes to know how to
change a direct speech into
indirect speech
<b>adverbs of manner :</b>
Adj + ly
Bad – Badly
Careful – Carefully
Soft – Softly
Good – Well
Fast – Fast
Hard – Hard
Ex: I cook well
She runs fast
<b>modals </b>
Can , could , may , might,...-> For ability
Would -> For invitation
Should -> For advice
Ex: You should practice speaking
English more often.
<b>Reported speech </b>
*Commands, requests and advice:
- Commands:
Ex: Sit down, please !
Open your book, please !
Shut up !
- Requests:
Ex: Can you open the door?
Can you give me your homework?
- Advice:
Ex: You should practice speaking
English more often.
* Commands, requests and advice in
reported speech :
-When we change direct speech into
indirect speech, we change reported verb
“ say” into “ tell / ask / advise”.
- If the direct speech is an affirmative,
we use the following formula :
tell (ask/advise) + pronoun + to V
Ex: The teacher said to the students: “
Stand up, please !”
-> The teacher told the students to stand
up
<b>* Production: ( 2’)</b>
? Retell the main gram?
use the following formula :
tell (ask/advise) + pronoun + not to V
Ex: She said to him: “ Don’t smoke”
-> She told him not to smoke
- Structures in the lesson
<b>* Homework: (3’)</b>
- Remind Ps to study at home and revise the main grammar structures from unit 4 to unit 6.
Prepare for the next test
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
******************************
<b>- Week: 13</b>
<i><b>- Period: 38</b></i> <b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 12/11/2011</b>
<b>I.The objectives:</b>
- To carry out professional regulations
- To check Ss’s understandings
- To find out more effective methods of teaching.
<b>II.The teaching aids : </b>
- Question sheets , keys,...
<b>III. The teaching procedure:</b>
<b>A.Class organizing: - Greetings</b>
- Checking attendances
<b>B.the test :</b>
<b>I. Listen and fill in the missing words :</b> (1 mark)
<b>different other popular biggest</b>
There are 3 aims of the scouting program. It started in England. Girls cannot join BSA but
they can attend(1)………..youth organization. Now scouting is (2)
……….…worldwide with more than 25 million members and it’s the (3)
……….…youth organization in the world. Now scouting program can be (4)
……….from many countries but it still keeps the three aims in 1907.
<b>II. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B:</b> (2 marks)
<b>A</b> <b>B</b>
1. Where did your Grandma use to live?
2. Which subject do you need to improve?
3. Could you help me, please?
4. When do they plant trees along the streets?
a. English and Math.
b. Sure. What can I do for you?
c. She used to live on a farm.
d. On October 15.
<b>III. Multiple choice:</b> <i><b>Choose the correct answer for each sentence (3 marks)</b></i>
1. Mrs. Nga speaks English _____________.
a. good b. goodly c. well
a. watch b. watched c. to watch
3. They should go to the movies ______________ 6:30 and 7:00.
a. on b. at c. between
4. Mai usually _____________ to school in the morning.
a. goes b. go c. went
5. Hoa used to ______________ long hair.
a. has b. have c. had
6. Quang had bad marks in Math last semester. He should _______________ .
a. watch TV a lot b. do a lot of homework c. write a lot of letters
<b>IV. Do as directed below:</b> (2 marks)
1. Ba loves (do) _______________ homework.
(Give the correct form of the verb)
2. Miss Jackson said to Tim’s mother: “ Tim was an excellent student”
<sub></sub>Tim’s mother said to Tim ___________________________________________
3. Bell was born _______________ March 3rd<sub> _______________ 1847.</sub>
(Fill in the blanks with the correct preposition)
4. She said to him : “ Don’t smoke”
<sub></sub> She told ___________________________________________________________
<b>V. Read the dialogue and answer the questions:</b> (2 marks)
Nga: Good morning. I am enrolling for the summer activities.
Miss Lien: Let me get an application form and we can fill it out. What’s your full name,
please?
Nga: Pham Mai Nga
Miss Lien: And when were you born?
Nga: On April 22, 1989.
Miss Lien: Where do you live and do you have a telephone number?
Nga: I live at 5 Tran Phu Street and my telephone number is 3 847 392.
Miss Lien: Now, what are your hobbies?
Nga: I like drawing, outdoor activities and acting.
<i><b> Questions:</b></i>
1. Who is Nga talking to?
2. Where does Nga live?
_____________________________________________________________________
3. Does Nga have a telephone number?
_____________________________________________________________________
4. What does Nga like?
__________________________________________________________________
--- THE END
<i><b>---Keys:</b></i>
<b>I. Listen and fill in the missing words :</b> (1 mark)
There are 3 aims of the scouting program. It started in England. Girls cannot join BSA but
they can attend (1) <i>other </i>youth organization. Now scouting is (2) <i>popular </i>worldwide with
more than 25 million members and it’s the (3) <i>biggest </i>youth organization in the world.
Now scouting program can be (4) <i>different</i> from many countries but it still keeps the three
aims in 1907.
<b>II. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B:</b> (2 marks)
1- c 2- a 3- b 4- d
<b>III. Multiple choice:</b> Choose the correct answer for each sentence (3 marks)
1- c. well
2- b. watched
3- c. between
4- a. goes
5- b. have
6- b. do a lot of homework
<b>IV. Do as directed below:</b> (2 marks)
1. doing
2. Tim’s mother said to Tim (that) you were an exellent student.
3. on - in
4. She told him not to smoke
<b>V. Read the dialogue and answer the questions:</b> (2 marks)
<b> Answers : </b>
1. Nga is talking to Miss Lien.
2. She lives at 5 Tran Phu Street.
3. Yes, she does.
4. She likes drawing, outdoor activities and acting.
<i><b>* Ma trận:</b></i>
<b>Chủ Đề</b> <b>Nhận Biết</b> <b>Thông Hiểu</b>
<b>KQ</b> <b>TL</b> <b>KQ</b>
<i><b>I. Listening</b></i> <b>4</b>
<b> 1.</b>
<b>0Đ</b>
<i><b>II. Reading</b></i> <b>4</b>
<b> </b>
<b>2.0Đ</b>
<i><b>III.Languag</b></i>
<i><b>e focus</b></i>
<b>10</b>
<b> </b>
<b>5,0Đ</b>
<i><b>IV. Writing</b></i>
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 13</b>
<i><b>- Period: 39</b></i>
<b>-Preparing date:</b>
<b>I.The objectives:</b>
- To help Ss find what they are
false,and what mistakes they
often make
- Consolidate what Ss haven’t
yet reached.
- correct the test.
II. comments :
Good :
Fair :
Average :
Poor :
Weak :
15%
25%
45%
14%
1%
->85% of students reach the basic
knowledge
-> Usage skills : 50 %
<b>III. guidline : </b>
- Reinforce regularly tests,
exercises ,etc.
- Check students’ studying more
often
<b>IV. The teaching procedure:</b>
<b>(5’)A.Clas</b>
<b>s organizing: - </b>
Greetings
-
Checking attendances
<b>(5’)B. </b>
<b>New lesson:</b>
<b>* Warm </b>
<b>up: </b>
- Ss
remember vocab
* Shark
<i><b>attack : (12 letters)</b></i>
--- (Answer : Organization)
<b>C.correcti</b>
<b>ons :(30’)</b>
<b>Teacher’s & Students’ activities</b>
- T recalls structures and
grammatical matters appearing in the
test.
- S focus
<i><b>Question I :</b></i>
Listen to use the structure
comunicative approach.
<b>I. Listen and fill in the missing</b>
<b>words :</b>
There are 3 aims of the scouting
program. It started in England. Girls
cannot join BSA but they can attend
(1) <i>other </i>
scouting is (2)
with more than 25 million members
and it’s the (3)
organization in the world. Now
from many countries but it still keeps
the three aims in 1907.
<i><b>Question II: </b></i>
Reading comprehension the passage
in book to about structure: simple
past, present simple tense.
<b>II. Match the questions in column</b>
<b>A with the answers in column B:</b>
marks)
1- c
2- a
3- b
4- d
<i><b>Question III:</b></i>
<b>III. Multiple choice:</b>
- T corrects some writing for
illustration.
<i><b>* Production: (3’)</b></i>
T: repeats the structures above
Ss: listen and write them on their
book
<i><b>* Homework:(2’)</b></i>
T: asks Ss to prepare next lesson
Unit 7
correct answer for each sentence (3
marks)
1- c. well
2- b. watched
3- c. between
4- a. goes
5- b. have
6- b. do a lot of homework
<i><b>Question IV :</b></i>
tell (ask/advise) + pronoun + (not)
to V
<b>IV. Do as directed below:</b>
1. doing
2. Tim’s mother said to Tim (that)
3. on - in
4. She told him not to smoke
<i><b>Question V :</b></i>
<b>V. Read the dialogue and answer</b>
<b>the questions:</b>
<b> Answers :</b>
1. Nga is talking to Miss Lien.
2. She lives at 5 Tran Phu Street.
3. Yes, she does.
4. She likes drawing, outdoor
activities and acting.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 14</b>
<i><b>- Period: 40</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 18/11/2011</b>
Lesson 1<b> : Getting </b>
* Aim: - Helping students to know
about the places in their neighborhood.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to know more
about Na's new neighbor.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedure:
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER:(2’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to repeat some structures in last lesson
<b> Ss:</b>
Answer in front of the class
<b>3. NEW </b>
<b>LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b>
* Warm-up: (Getting started) (5’) - Ask Ss to match the names of places
a. grocery store b. stadium
c. wet market d. drug store
e. hairdresser's f. swimming pool
<b>* Pre-reading: ( 15’)</b>
□ Pre-teach vocab:
- close by (adv): gần
- (to) serve (v): phục vụ
- a pancake (n): bánh xèo
- tasty (adj): ngon, hợp khẩu vị
□ Pre- questions:
a. How long has Nam lived in that
neighborhood?
b. Where does Na want to go?
with the switable pictures.
- Match the names of places found in
a neighborhood.
- listen and repeat-copy down.
- Present new words and guide ss to
read them in chorus.
- Read in chorus
- Check Ss' memory by technique
"What and where".
- Writ the words in the correct circles.
- Give two questions and ask students
to work in pairs to guess the answers.
- listen and predict the answers.
<b>* While-reading: ( 10’)</b>
□ Do exercise 2 on page 64.
a. New.
b. last week.
c. tired.
d. restaurant.
e. Hue
f. pancakes.
<b>* Post-reading</b><b> ( 3’)</b>
a. How long has Nam lived here?
b. Is Na's mother tired?
c. What Kind of food does the
restaurant serve?
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue.
- Read the dialogue and check their
prediction.
- Read the dialogue again and
complete the sentences on page 64.
- Give feedback
- Listen and correct Ss' mistakes.
- Listen and give the correct answers.
- Practise asking and answering the
questions in pairs.
<b>* Homework</b><b> ( 2’)</b>
Write a passage about their
neighborhood by answering the
following questions:
a. How long have you lived in your
neighborhood?
b. Do you like it? Why?
c. Is there a restaurant/ post office/
market/... in your neighborhood?
d. How do you do to keep your
neighborhood clean.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 14</b>
<i><b>- Period: 41+42</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 21/11/2011</b>
<b>Lesson 2: </b>
* Aims: - Speaking about how to
send a parcel or a letter.
* Objectives: - By the end of the
letter, students will be able to talk about to
send parcels or letters. know what Na is
going to do on weekend by listening.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
<b> * Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER : (1’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (5’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to to write the previous vocabulary and
one to read the text in front of the class.
<b> Ss:</b>
Answer in front of the class
<b>3. NEW </b>
<b>LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b>
* Warm up : Chatting ( 5’)
- Show a letter and ask Ss some questions
+ What is this ?
+ Where can I post it to my friend ?
+ How can I post it ?
+ How much ?
+ Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ?
+ Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ?
Lead in the new lesson .
* Presentation : (15’)
1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- air – mail : thư hàng không
- surface mail : thư đường bộ
- charge (v / n )
* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and
<b>remember </b>
2. Reading comprehension
- Set the scene “ Mrs Kim wants to send a
parcel to Qui Nhon , so she has to go to the
post office .”
- Give Ss some questions and ask Ss to work
in pairs to compare their answers .
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find out the
answers
a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail or
surface mail ? Why ?
b. What is the weight of her parcel ?
c. How much does she pay ?
- Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions
* Answers :
a. Mrs Kim send the parcel surface mail
because it is much cheaper .
b. Her parcel is five kilograms .
c. She pays 19, 200 dongs .
* Practice : (3’)
- Call on a student to play role of Mrs Kim
and practice the dialogue with teacher
( clerk )
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
Correct their pronunciation
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue
* Further practice :
- Set the scene and ask Ss to make the
dialogue
1. Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail
- Ask Ss to make the dialogue between Lan
and the clerk in the post office .
- Elicit and encourage Ss to make the
dialogue themselves .
Expected dialogue
Clerk : Can I help you ?
Mrs Lan : I want to send a letter to Kontom .
Clerk : Do you want to send it airmail or
surface mail ?
Mrs Lan : I send it airmail . How much is it ?
Clerk : Let me see . Mmm , 15 grams , it
is only 1,200 dongs .
Mrs Lan : Here you are .
Clerk : Thank you .
- Get Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs
2. Postcard / HCM city / airmail / 15 g
3. Parcel / Ca Mau ? air mail / 2 kg
4. Parcel / Buon Me Thuot / surface / 5 kgs .
- Divide class into 3 groups , each prepares a
dialogue
- Call on 2 pairs from each group to practice
their dialogue .
- Get Ss to work in pairs , practicing three
dialogues and move around class to help Ss .
* Pre - listening : (3’)
- Set the scene “ Na is new in the
neighborhood . She is talking to Nam about
what she is going to do on the weekend .”
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and give
the answers and fill in the blanks in each
advertisement
* While - listening : ( 10’)
1. Listening task :
- Let Ss listen to the tape twice and give the
answers
- Give feedback
a. The new comer b. Town Ground
c. English speaking contest d . Culture
House
2. Listening task 2 :
- Ask Ss to read the statements in the
exercises 2/66
- Get Ss to guess which is true , which is
false which has no information
- Ask Ss to share their ideas with their
friends .
- Let Ss listen to the conversation again n and
tick in the correct boxes : True ? False or No
information
Statements T F
a. Na does not know the b
neighborhood very well
b. Na does not like movies
c. Na will go to the photo
exhibition this weekend
d. Na will not go to the
English speaking Contest
f. Nam is a soccer fan .
X
X
X
X
X
3.Comprehension questions
- Ask Ss some questions to check their
understanding of the conversation .
- Turn on the tape again .
a. Does Na like movies ?
b. Why will not she go to see the film “ The
New comer “ ?
c. Why will not Na go to the photo exhibition
?
d. Who will Na go to the soccer match with ?
e. What time does the match start ?
* Post - Listening : ( 2’)
- Ask Ss to work in groups to talk to their
friends about what Na is going to do this
weekend .
- Call on some volunteers from each group to
tell the whole class about Na .
* Homework : ( 1’)
1. Write a short passage about what Na is
going to do .
2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 15</b>
<i><b>- Period: 43</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 25/11/2011</b>
<b>Lesson 3 </b>
* Aim: - Reading for details about
Tran Phu Shopping Mal.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to understand the
passage about a new shopping Mall..
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER : (1’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (9’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to write a short passage about what Na is
going to do in front of the class.
<b> Ss:</b>
Answer in front of the class
<b> 3. NEW </b>
<b>LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up : ( 5’) Guessing the words </b>
- Give Ss the definitions and get Ss to find
out the words as quickly as possible .
1. a place where you can buy everything
2. A place where you can buy vegetables
and fruit .
3. A place where you can buy books .
4. A place where you can come to eat .
5. A place where you can come to see the
movies .
6. A person who comes to the store and
buys something .
=> Lead in the new lesson
<b>Pre- reading (15’)</b>
<i><b>1. New words</b></i>
- mall (n) khu thương mại
- roof (n) mái nhà, mái vòm
- convenient (a): thuận tiện
- humid (n): ẩm thấp
- customer (n): khách hàng
- resident (n): cư dân
<i><b>2.Grammar: </b></i>
- the same + (n) + as
- different from
* True or False?
True False
a. The mall is open daily
b. there are 50 stores in the
mall
c. not everyone is pleased
about the new mall
d. It will be more
comfortable to shop in the
mall...
e. Some of the stores on
Tran Phu Street may have
to close.
<b>While-reading: ( 10’)</b>
<i><b>* Answer</b></i>
<i>a. It is very different from the present</i>
<i>shopping area. All the shops are under the</i>
<i>roof. That will be very convenient,</i>
<i>especially during the hot and humid</i>
<i>summer months. Customers will shop in</i>
<i>comfort and won’t notice the weather</i>
<i>b. In the shopping mall, there are 50 air –</i>
<i>conditioned specially stores, 4 movie</i>
<i>theaters and 10 restaurants there is also a</i>
<i>children’s play area.</i>
<i>c. They think the new shopping mall will</i>
<i>take their business.</i>
<i>d. The stores in the mall will offer a wider</i>
<i>selection of products. Some kinds of goods</i>
<i>at cheaper prices.</i>
* Post-reading <b>( 2’)</b>
<i>- Under one roof</i>
<i>- shop in comfort</i>
<i>- Have been concern about</i>
<i>- offer a wider selection</i>
<i>- take their business</i>
<i>- specially stores</i>
<b>* Homework: ( 3’)</b>
- Remind Ps to study at home and prepare
for the next lesson.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 15</b>
<i><b>- Period: 44</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 28/11/2011</b>
<b>Lesson</b> <b>5</b>
* Aim: - Helping Ss to write a
notice.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to write a notice.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER : (1’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (4’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to write vocabulary on blackboard
<b> Ss:</b>
Answer in front of the class
<b>3. NEW </b>
<b>LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b>
I / Warm up : (5’) Chatting
1. Have you ever written a notice ?
2. To whom ?
3. What for ?
4. What type ?
=> Lead in the new lesson .
II / Pre - writing : (15’)
Introduce the topic of the writing and the
scene “ The residents and store owners on
Tran Phu Street are going to hold a meeting to
discuss the effects of the new mall . “
1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- effects (n) = tác động, tác dụng, hiệu quả
- contact (v) = liên lạc
- hardware store = cửa hàng sắt
2. Guiding questions
a. Why are the residents and store owners on
Tran Phu street going to hold a meeting ?
b. When will they hold a meeting ? What
time ?
c. Where will they hold the meeting ?
- Get Ss to read the notice and answer some
questions to check their understanding.
- Call on some pairs to practice asking
answering the questions .
- Give feedback
a. To discuss the effects of the new mall
b. They will hold the meeting on May 20 at 8
p.m
c. They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Dao
Street , Binh ,<sub>s hardware store . </sub>
- Let Ss know how to write a notice , not
write full sentences .
* Reading :
- Ask Ss to read the passage and ask some
questions to check their understanding , get
them to use short answers .
1. What is the English Speaking club going to
hold ?
2. Where and when will it be held ?
3. What time ?
d. Who is the person contact ?
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .
III / While -writing : ( 15’)
- Get Ss to write the notice individually
- Monitor and help them write
- Ask Ss to share with their partners
- Check some notices and correct them
- Write the model notice on the board
Suggested answers :
<b>The school English Speaking club</b>
<b>Holding A Speaking Contest to celebrate</b>
<b>teacher,<sub>s day</sub></b>
Date : November 15
Time : 7.30 pm to 10.oo pm
Place : Hall 204 , Building G
Please contact Ms .Tran Thi Thu Hang of
class 8H at the above address for more
information .
IV / Post - writing : (3’)
- Ask Ss to write one notice about their class
meeting
- Get them to work in group
- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of
class .
- Give feedback
V / Homework : (2’)
1. Write the completed notice in their
notebooks
<b>- Week: 15</b>
<i><b>- Period: 45</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 30/11/2011</b>
<b>Lesson</b> <b>5 </b> :
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, students will be able to use Present
* Teaching aids: - Textbook,
posters, cards.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER : (1’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (5’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to write the completed notice in their
notebooks on blackboard or read in front
of the class.
<b> Ss:</b>
Answer in front of the class
<b>3. NEW </b>
<b>LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T's activties & Ss' activities</b>
<i><b>* Warm up: Matching ( 5’)</b></i>
1. Match
Be – been see – seen
Go – gone write – written
- Stick a poster of infinitives and Past
Participles on the board.
- Divide the class in to two teams.
- Get students from two teams to write
Eat – eaten work – worked
Live – lived collect –
collected
<i><b>* Presentation: (10’)</b></i>
2. Complete Use “for/ since”
- for 5 minutes for – three
hours
- since January for – 10
weeks
- since 1990 since
Friday
- for the summer for 20 years
<i><b>* Practice: ( 6’)</b></i>
3. Complete the sentences
b. haven’t eaten
c. haven’t seen
d. have attended
e. has worked
f. has collected
<i><b>4. Complete: (5’)</b></i>
1. Have been 5. Want
2. hope 6. Is looks
3. have..lived 7. Have ..been
4. is 8. Have seen
<i><b>5. Complete the sentences: ( 8’)</b></i>
a. not as big as
b. different from
c. not as cheap as
d. the same as
e. as expensive as
f. different from
g. as long as
h. not as modern as
i. not as cheap as
<i><b>* Production: (3’)</b></i>
each pair of infinitive-past participle on
the board.
- Have ps repeat the words in chorus.
+ Explain how to use
Ps to complete the expressions using
and since
- Call Ps to practice in front of the class.
=> Form :
Use : to talk about something which
started in the past and continues up to the
present
We often uses “ For “ and “ Since “
with the Present Perfect Tense
+ Have Ps complete the sentences. Use
the present perfect form of the verbs in
brackets.
- Ask Ps to work in pairs or in groups to
do this exercise.
* Set the scene: Na is new in Nam
neighborhood. They are talking to each
other. Give students an open dialogue
between Nam and Na then ask them to
complete it.
- Call some pairs to prsactice the
* Notice:
- ...the same + N + as ....
- ... different from...
- ... (not) as ... as ....
+ Look at the pictures. Complete the
sentences use the words in the box. You
<i><b>* Homework: (2’)</b></i>
will have to use some words more than
one.
Ask Ps to practice in pairs in front of the
class.
- Remind Ps to study at home and
prepare for the next lesson.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 16</b>
<i><b>- Period: 46</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 02/12/2011</b>
<b>Lesson 1 : </b> <b> Getting</b>
* Aim: - Reading for details about
the differences between city life and
country life.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the
city life and the country life.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER : (1’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (4’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to write the structures and usage of the
present perfect form in front of the class
and give 3 examples.
<b> Ss:</b>
Answer in front of the class
<b>3. NEW </b>
<b>LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm-up: (Chatting) (5’)</b>
a. Where do you live?
b. Do you want to live in the city
why?
c. Do you want to live in the country?
Why?
<b>* Pre-reading: ( 10’)</b>
□ Pre-teach vocab:
<i>- permanently ( adv): vĩnh viễn, mãi</i>
<i>mãi</i>
<i>- remote (a): xa xôi, hẻo lánh</i>
<i>- facility ( n): cơ sở vật chất</i>
<i>- accessible (a): có thể sử dụng được</i>
<i>- definitely (adv ): chắc chắn, rõ ràng</i>
<i>- medical (adj): y tế</i>
<i>- relative ( n): người bà con thân</i>
<i>thiện</i>
<i>* Checking vocab:</i> “Rub out and
<i><b>remember.”</b></i>
□ Brainstouning** (getting started)
- Talk to Ss about life the city and
life in the country by asking some
questions.
- Listen and answers the questions.
- Present new words on the board.
- Listen and repeat copy down.
- Read the words in chorus.
- Guide Ss to read the words in
chorus.
- Get Ss to talk about city life and
country life.
- Talk about city life anf country
<b>* While-reading:(15’)</b>
□ Read the dialogue.
□ Compare their ideas.
□ Answers the questions (p.73)
a. Where has Na been?
b. How long was she there?
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and
compare their ideas.
- Read the dialogue and compare
their ideas.
- Answers the questions on page 73.
- Give feedback.
City life Country life
noisy quiet
c. What is her opinion of the
countryside?
d. Na says "there is nothing to do".
What does she mean by this?
e. What are some of the changes that
hoa mentions?
<b>* Post-reading: (3’)</b>
□ Practive the dialogue.
□ Discuss in groups
- Do you prefer the city or the country
life? Why?
<i>a. Na has been to Kin Lien village </i>
<i>b. She was there for the weekend </i>
<i>c. to her , the countryside is </i>
<i>peaceful and quiet and there is </i>
<i>nothing to do . </i>
<i>d. There is no libraries , no movies ,</i>
<i>no supermarket , no zoos …</i>
<i>e. Country life is becoming better . </i>
<i>Many remote area are getting </i>
<i>electricity . People can now have </i>
<i>things like refrigerators and TV , </i>
<i>medical facilities are more </i>
<i>accessible</i>
- Get more information.
- Correct their mistakes.
- Practise the dialogue.
- Move around and correct Ss'
pronunciation.
<b>* Homework: ( 2’)</b>
- Ask Ss to write a shout passage
about why they prefer the city life or
the country life.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 15</b>
<i><b>- Period: 47</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 05/12/2011</b>
<b>Lesson 2: - Speak</b>
* Aim: - Listening for details to
complete the dialogue and Further
Dractice in Present Progressive tense.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, students will be able to complete
the dialogue by listening and Further
Practice in Present continuous to talk
about the future.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook, cards.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER : (1’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (4’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to write or read a shout passage about
why they prefer the city life or the country
life in front of the class.
<b> Ss:</b>
Answer in front of the class
<b>3. NEW </b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm-up: (Matching) (5’)</b>
Play the house
Do my aunt, Mrs Hang
Watch a meeting.
Go to man
Clean to violin lesson
Have table tennis
Phone my homework
Speak a programe
<b>* Pre- speaking: (5’)</b>
- students look at 2 pictures on the
board.
<i>+ </i>What do you see in 2 pictures?
<b>Picture 1</b> <b>Picture 2</b>
<i>Small house High buildings</i>
- Prepare 8 cards with phrases on
them. Write 8 verbs on the board
- Stick the cards with phrases
besides the suitable verbs.
- Divide the class into 2 teams and
hand out each team 8 cards.
Asks student look at pictures on
board
- look at pictures
<i>Bicycles</i> <i>Motorbikes,cars,Taxi</i>
<i>s</i>
<i>Narrow</i>
<i>roads</i>
<i>Long and wide roads</i>
<i>……… ………..</i>
* While- speaking: ( 7’)
<i>- What you see in the pictures are the</i>
<i>city 5 years ago and now. You work in</i>
<i>pairs, talking about the changes of the</i>
<i>city by comparing 2 pictures. Use the</i>
<i>words in the box.</i>
- students work in pair:
Ex: The town is becoming busier
- Some pairs practice in front of class.
* Answer:
<i>- Traffic is getting busier.</i>
<i>- There are more tall buildings and</i>
<i>houses.</i>
<i>- The Town is becoming more beatiful.</i>
<i>- There are more green trees.</i>
<i>………..</i>
<i><b>* Post- speaking: ( 5’)</b></i>
-Students practice in groups to talk
about the changes in their city or town.
<i><b>* Pre – listening: (3’)</b></i>
- Complete the dialogue use the verbs
in the present progressive tense (page
78)
- Review the form of the present
Progressive tense.
□ Set the scence.
□ Guess the missing words.
<b>* While-listening: ( 10’)</b>
□ Listen to the tape and check their
predition (p.74)
- Turn on the tape and check their
predictions
- Let them listen twice and find out the
missing words individually .
- guides
- listen
- asks
Listen and practice in groups
- calls
- Complete the dialogue, using the
suitable verbs in the Present
Progressive tense.
- Read the dialogue.
- Predict the missing words.
- Ask Ss to work in groups and talk
about changes in their hometown /
neighborhood .
- Call on volunteer from each group
to show their ideas before the class .
- Call on some Ss to report their
predictions
- Guide Ss how to do exercise.
- Correct the mistakes.
- Set the scence to introduce the
dialogue - letSs predict.
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape.
- Listen to the tape and check their
prediction
- Give feedback.
- Ask Ss to share their answers with
their partners
- Call some Ss to read their results
Give feedback:
1. that 2. this 3. It is
- Listen and correct the mistakes.
<b>* Post-listening: ( 5’)</b>
- Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and
Aunt Hang to practice the dialogue
- Help Ss practise.
- Practise speaking.
<b>* Homework:(2’)</b>
- Ask Ss to Remind Ps to study at home
and prepare for the next lesson. Learn
by heart the dialogue and read the
section Read.
T asks Ss to listen and write
exercise
- Ss listen and write.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 16</b>
<i><b>- Period: 48</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 08/12/2011</b>
<b>Lesson 3: </b>
* Aim: - Reading comprehension
about the problem of people from the
countryside moving to the city.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to understand the
text about one of the social problems.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER : (1’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (4’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to learn by heart the dialogue and read the
section Read and answer the question in
front of the class.
<b> Ss:</b>
Answer in front of the class
<b>3. NEW </b>
<b>LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b>
* Warm up : (5’)
Jumbled words
- Write the words with disordered letters on the
board .
+ Fulentipl -> plentiful
+ taneru -> nature
+ loofd -> flood
+ roestdy -> destroy
+ viroped -> provide
+ suertl -> result
+ ciliestial -> facilities
- Ask them to write the correct words on the board
and repeat chorally , individually
=> Lead in the new lesson .
* Pre- reading : ( 15’)
- Introduce the topic of the passage reading and
some new words to Ss .
1. Pre - teach vocabulary :
- rural (adj ) : something deals with the
countryside
- urban ( adj ) >< rural
- strain (n) = sự quá tải( dân số)
- typhoon (n) = storm (n)
- drought (n) : hot and dry weather for a long time
- to struggle = đấu tranh
- migrant (n) : a person who moves from one place
to another especially in order to find work .
- to increase = tăng lên, tăng thêm
* Checking vocabulary : What and where
2. Brainstorming :
- Ask Ss to think of the difficulties of farmers
Possible answers :
droughts / the weather / hard work / no vacations /
lack of clean water / electricity / insects destroy
harvests ..
- Ask Ss to work in groups to guess how farmers
deal with difficulties
- Call on some Ss to report their predictions and
write them on the board
* While - reading<i> :</i> ( 10’)
- Let Ss listen to the tape and read the text silently
to check their predictions .
- Answer “ What do many farmers do to solve
their problem ? “
=> They have to move to the city so that they can
get well – paid jobs .
- Call on some Ss to read the text in front of class .
1. Gap- filling :
- Ask Ss to work in pairs o complete summary ,
using the information from the passage .
- Call on some volunteers to report their results
- Give feedback
<i>1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural </i>
<i>5. city 6. problems 7. schools 8. hospitals </i>
<i> 9. problem 10 . world </i>
- Call on some Ss to read the complete passage
aloud
2. Finding the words
- Ask Ss to read the text again and work with their
partners
- Call them to report their results
- Give feedback
<i>a. rural b. plentiful c. increase </i>
d. strain e. tragedy f. urban
* Post - reading <i>:</i><b> </b><i> <b>( 7’) </b></i>
<b>Discussion</b>
- Give a situation : If you were a Minister , what
difficulties of
would you do for farmers ?
- Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss
* Suggested answers :
- build streets , theatres , stadiums in the
countryside
- build schools , hospitals
- provide clean water , electricity , facilities
- build factory .
- Call on 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their
ideas before the class .
<i>* <b>Homework</b> : <b>( 2’)</b></i>
1. Write 5 things that government should do for
the rural areas
2. Prepare the next lesson .
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 16</b>
<i><b>- Period: 49</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 010/12/2011</b>
Lesson 4:
* Aim: - Writing letters to friends
about the neighborhood.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to write letters to
their friends about their neighborhood.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook, cards.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER : (1’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to write 5 things that government should
do for the rural areas in front of the class.
<b>3. NEW </b>
<b>LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm-up: (Revision) (5’)</b>
Review the form of a letter.
1. Heading:
<b></b> Write's address
<b></b> Date
<b></b> Dear ...,
2. Opening
3. Body of letter
4. Closing.
<b>* Pre-writing ( 10’)</b>
□ Discuss and answers the questions
a. Where do you lire?
b. What does your house look like?
c. What can you see from your bedroom
window?
d. How far is it from your home to school?
e. What kind of facilities are there in your
neighborhood?
f. What things in your neighborhood do you
like best? Why?
<b>* While-reading: ( 15’)</b>
□ Write a letter to a friend about your
neighborhood, using the answers.
<i><b>( Writer</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s address)</sub></b></i>
<i><b>( Date ) </b></i>
<i>Dear ...., </i>
<i>I live in ….. , a small town . My family has a </i>
<i>large house with four rooms and a small </i>
<i>garden . My sister and I share one bedroom . </i>
<i>From the bedroom window , I can see a </i>
<i>beautiful park with green tress , flowers and a </i>
<i>pond . we do not live far form my school so I </i>
<i>usually walk there . </i>
<i>In my neighborhood , there is a swimming pool</i>
<i>and a beautiful park . On the weekend , I often </i>
<i>Do you have a library like that in your </i>
<i>neighborhood ? Is there anything interesting </i>
<i>in the place where you live ? Write to me </i>
<i>I would like to say goodbye now . I am looking </i>
<i>forwards to hearing from you soon . </i>
<i>Love , </i>
<i>( Signature ) </i>
<b>* Post-writing</b><i>: <b>( 5’)</b></i>
<b>Correction</b>
- Choose some letters to correct before class
and ask them to read them aloud .
<i><b>* Homework: ( 2’)</b></i>
Students write a letter to your friends about
neiborhood.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 17</b>
<i><b>- Period: 50</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 12/12/2011</b>
<b>Lesson 6: </b>
* Aim: - Further Practice in
comparative and superlative adjectives.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to use comparative
and superlative adjectives..
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER : (1’)</b>
<b> </b> Greeting
and checking attendance
<b>2.CHECK UP: (7’)</b>
T: Asks Ss
to write a letter to your friends about
neiborhood. in front of the class.
<b> Ss:</b>
Answer in front of the class
<b>3. NEW </b>
<b>LESSON:</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up : ( 5’) Matching </b>
A B
1. play
2. do
3. watch
4. go
5. clean
6. have
7. phone
a. to Mom
b. table tennis
c. a program
d. a meeting
e. my aunt , Mrs Hang
f. the house
g. my homework
h. to violin lesson
- Call 2 volunteers from 2 teams to do the
matching
<i><b>* Practice : ( 22’)</b></i>
1. Ex 2 : Ask Ss to use the suitable verbs in the
Present Progressive Tense to complete the exercise
- Get Ss to work in pairs
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogues
before class and correct
=> What tense do we use in 6 dialogues ?
What is the form ?
Look at the adverbs of time in the dialogue .
Are they at present or in the future ?
Present Progressive Tense is used to talk about
the future .
2. Ex 1 : Ask Ss to practice the dialogue as
example
S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11. 30 ?
S2 : Is that good fortune ?
S1 : That is right
S2 : I am very sorry . It has been delayed .
S1 : Oh , no !
S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 . 45
- Give them the shipping information and ask them
to make similar dialogues
3. Ex 3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to
describe changes with “ get “ and “ become “
* Drill : Prepare six cards of cues
a. The boys / get / tall
b. The old men / become / weak
c. It / become / dark
d. The weather / get / cold
f. The school yard / become / cleaner
- Model first two cues , then whole class repeat
chorally , then some Ss read out individually
- Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in
class can remember the structure .
4 . Comparative and superlative adjectives
- Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and
superlative adjectives
* Comparative : Short adj - er + than + object
<b> More long adj + than + object</b>
* Superlative : The + short adjective - est
<b> The most + long adjective</b>
* Irregular adjectives
good/ well – better – the best
bad – worse – the worst
many – more – the most
little – less – the least
Ex 4 : Have Ss work in pairs to make
comparisons between the city and the country .
Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the
city
- Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences
- Give feedback
* Further practice : ( 8’)
- Ask Ss to read the advertisements then ask them
some questions to check their understanding
+ what are advertised ?
( an apartment , a villa and a house )
+ How old are they ?
( The apartment is 2 years old , the villa is 5 years
old and the house is new )
+ How much do we pay per month ?
( 900,000 dongs for the apartment , 6,6 million
dongs for the house and 7,8 million dongs for the
villa )
- Game “ Nought and Crosses “ , using
comparative and superlative adjectives
old expensive big
expensive small hot
big beautiful old
Eg : - The villa is older than the apartment
- The house is more expensive than the
apartment * Homework <i>:</i> ( 2’)
1/Redo all the exercises and copy down
2/ Prepare the next lesson .
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 17</b>
<i><b>- Period: 51</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 15/12/2011</b>
<b>*Aim: Listening for details and </b>
further practice in adverbs of place,
<i><b>Present simple tense, (not ) </b></i>
<i><b>adjective + enough + infinitive </b></i>
<b>* Objective: By the end of the </b>
lesson, Ss will be able to remnembber the
structures learned
<b>* Teaching aids: Textbook.</b>
<b>* Procedures: </b>
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER:</b> <i><b>(1’)</b></i>
<b>Greeting</b>
<b>Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP:</b>
<i><b>( 4’)</b></i>
T: T asks Ss to repeat
the structures in the lesson from Unit
1-Unit 8
Ss: think and answer
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>*Warm up: ( 5’)</b></i>
<b>Chain game (by using present simple tense)</b>
+ Teacher: Today I go to bookstore to buy a
book.
+ Group 1: Today I go to bookstore to buy a
book and two pens.
+ Group 2: Today I go to bookstore to buy a
book, two pens and a ruler.
+ Group 3: …….
<i><b>* Presentation ( 25’)</b></i>
<i><b>1. Present Simple tense.( </b><b> Thì hiện tại đơn</b><b> ) </b></i>
- Use : Để diễn tả các sự việc một cách tổng
quát , không nhất thiết chỉ nghĩ đến hiện tại
. Ta dùng thì này để nói đến mét sự việc
nào đó xảy ra liên tục ,lặp đi lặp lại nhiều
lần , hay mơt điều gì đó ln ln đúng ,dù
cho sự việc đó có xảy ra ngay tại lúc nói
hay không là điều không quan trọng
- Form: + S + V/Vs / es +
………
Ex -The earth goes around the sun.
- S + don’t/doesn’t + V+ ………..
-We don’t have classes on Sunday? - ---
- Does Lan speak French?
<i><b>2. (not ) adjective + enough + infinitive </b></i>
( không ) đủ ……….. để
Ex: The water is hot enough for me to
drink.
She isn’t old enough to be in my class
<i><b>3. Near Future: Be going to ( </b><b> thì tương lai </b></i>
<i><b>gần )</b></i>
- Form : S + is / am/ are + going to + Vinf
- Use : Dùng khi nói về một việc mà ai đó
quyết định sẽ làm hay dự định sẽ làm trong
tương lai.
Ex : There is a good film on TV
tonight. I’m going to stay home to
watch TV .
- Note : Be going to còn dùng để dự đốn
một tình huống có thể xảy ra
Ex: I feel tired . I think I’m going to be
sick.
<i><b>4. Adverb of place ( </b><b> Trạng từ chỉ nơi chốn</b></i>
downstairs ,next to ,under ,…………..
Ex: The money was finally found under the
boards.
<i><b>5. Reflexive pronouns.( </b><b> Đại từ phản thân</b></i>
myself, yourself, himself, herself, itself,
ourselves, yourselves, themselves .
- Diễn tả hành động trở lại với chính người
thực hiện .
+ Nó có thể làm túc từ (Object ) Ex: Be
careful.. You’ll cut yourself.
+ Nó đứng ngay sau từ mà nó làm mạnh
nghĩa. Ex : An sent this letter itself.
<b>- </b>Đại từ phản thân làm mạnh nghĩa cho chủ
từ. Nó đứng ngay sau chủ từ, hoặc đứng ở
cuối mệnh đề /câu.
Ex: Mary herself cleaned the floor.
<i><b>* Consolidation ( 3’)</b></i>
T: asks Ss to repeat the structures in
front of the class.
Ss: listen and talk in front of the
class
<i><b>* Homework: ( 2’)</b></i>
- Learn by heart the structures
- prepare the next revision
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 18</b>
<i><b>- Period: 52</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 16/12/2011</b>
<b>*Aim: Listening for details </b>
and further practice in
adverbs of place, Modal
<i><b>verbs, Questions with </b></i>
<i><b>“WHY”</b><b> :</b><b> Past Simple Tense </b></i>
<b>* Objective: By the end of </b>
the lesson, Ss will be able to
remnembber the structures
learned
<b>* Teaching aids: Textbook.</b>
<b>* Procedure: </b>
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ORDER:</b> <i><b>(1’)</b></i>
<b>Greeting</b>
<b>Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP:</b>
(5’)
T: asks Ss to repeat the structures
in the last lesson Present simple
<i><b>tense, (not ) adjective + enough </b></i>
<i><b>+ infinitive and Near Future: Be </b></i>
<i><b>going to ( </b><b> thì tương lai gần )</b></i>
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>*Warm up: ( 5’)</b></i>
<b>Slap the board (by using of the modal </b>
<b>verbs)</b>
<b> </b>
<b> Must Have to Ought to</b>
<b> </b>
Should Can
<i><b>* Presentation ( 30’)</b></i>
<i><b>6. Modal verbs </b></i>
- Form : + S + modal verb + V +
………. Ex : I can sing very
well.
- S + modal verb + not + V +
……… Ex : Hoa may not come to
the party tomorrow.
? Modal verb + S + V +
………….? Ex : May I come in ?
- Modal verb : must, ought to, have
to,should
<b>* </b>MUST : là khiếm trợ động từ ( a modal )
diễn tả sự bắt buộc hay sự cần thiết có
tính chủ quan- do cảm nghĩ của người
nói. (Ex: He <b>must</b> do this exercise
again.), hay diễn tả tính qui tắc hay lề
luật . (Ex: We <b>must</b> drive on the right.)
<b>* HAVE TO</b> : diễn tả sự bắt buộc hay sự
cần thiết có tính khách quan – do yếu tố
bên ngoài.
Ex: Your eyes are weak. You <b>have to</b>
wear glasses.
<b>* OUGHT TO + V</b>(base form) (neân):
diễn tả lời khuyên. Ex: We <b>ought to</b>
obey our parents.
<b>* SHOULD</b>: diễn tả lời khuyên Ex:
You should help the needed children.
<b>* MAY / CAN / COULD : </b>được dùng để
diễn tả lời yêu cầu hay đề nghị
- Yêu cầu sự giúp đỡ: <b> Can / Could + </b>
<b>you + V + O / A,please ?(</b>Ex: Can you
help me ,please.)
- Đề nghị giúp ai: <b>May + I + V + </b>
<b>O/A ?; Let + me + V + O/A. ; Do you</b>
<b>need any help? Shall + I + V + O / </b>
<b>A ? </b>Ex: May I help you?
<b>* WILL</b>: dùng để diễn tả lời yêu cầu , đề
nghị hoặc lời hứa
<b>- Will + you + V + O + A / M , </b>
<b>please? </b>Diễn tả lời yêu cầu.
Ex: Will you turn of the fan, please
? I’m cold.
- <b>I + will + V + O + A / M ? </b> diễn tả
lời đề nghị làm điều gì cho ai .
Ex: The phone is ringing . I’ll
answer for you.
- <b>S + will + V + O + A / M ? </b> dieãn
tả lời hứa . Ex: I’m sory. This won’t
happen again.
<b>* Would / Do you + mind + . . . + ? </b>
diễn tả lời yêu cầu lịch sự .
<b>- Would you mind + V-ing ( gerund) ? </b>
Ex:Would you mind <b>telling </b>me the result
of the exam.
-<b> Would / Do you mind if + I + V . . .? </b>
diễn tả yêu cầu được làm điều gì
Ex: <b>Would you mind if I opened</b> the
window?<b> Do you mind if I open</b> the
window?
<i><b>7. Questions with “WHY”</b></i>:<i><b> </b></i> Dùng để hỏi
về nguyên nhân hay lý do
<i><b>Why + do / aux. V </b></i>
<i><b>+ S + Vm + </b></i>
T: reviews the structure
<i><b>Questions with “WHY”</b></i>
<i><b>Simple Tense (</b></i>
<i><b>đơn)</b></i>
Ss: listen and give the use of the
structure
T: Explains again and gives
Example
Ss: listen and write in their
book.
<i><b>O . . . ?</b></i>
Ex: <b>Why do</b> they cover the electric
sockets?
Để trả lời cho câu hỏi với WHY ta có thể
dùng :
- Mệnh đề với “because”. Ex: Why do
you get up early? – Because I want to do
exercise.
- Cụm động từ nguyên mẫu . Ex: Why do
you do exercise? – To keep healthy.
<i><b>8. Past Simple Tense (Thì quá khứ đơn)</b></i>
- Use : Diễn tả hành động xảy ra vàkết
thúc tại một thời điểm xác định ở quá khứ
- Form: + S + V-ed(regular) / V2 ( column irregular) +
………… Ex : - He arrived here yesterday.
- S + didn’t + V + ……….
? Did + S + V + ……… ?
- Did you clean this table?
- Note: Thì quá khứ đơn thường được
dùng với các cum từ chỉ thời gian xác
định ở quá khứ : <b>last </b>week / month /
year . . ., a week / 3 days / 5 months . . . ,
yesterday, <b>yesterday</b> morning / evening,
<b>In</b>+ năm, <b>from </b>2000 <b>to</b>2005
- Cách đọc các đông từ ở quá khứ đơn với
“ ED”:
+ “ ED”: được đọc là /t/ khi những động
từ nguyên mẫu có âm tận cùng là /f/,
/k/, /p/, /s/,/t/, //.
Ex : laughed , asked , helped ,
watch , pushed , dressed , ………
+ “ ED”: đươcï đọc là /id/ khi những động
từ nguyên mẫu có âm tận cùng là /d/ và
/t/
Ex : enjoyed , saved , filled ,……….
<b>9. Preposition of time ( Giới từ chỉ thời</b>
<b>gian ) : </b> at, in ,on, from . . . to, for, by
- <b>AT : </b> + một điểm thời gian cụ thể
Ex : We have class at one
o’clock.
+ night
Ex : I sleep at night.
<b>- IN : </b> + tháng/năm cụ thể
Ex : I was born 1994
+ the morning/afternoon / evening
Ex : We have class in the
morning.
<b>- ON: </b> + ngày trong tuần
Ex : We have class on
Monday.
+ ngày tháng năm
Ex: I was born on April 6,
2006
<b>- FROM </b>+ một điểm thời gian + <b>TO </b>+
một điểm thời gian
Ex: We have class from 7.00 to
10.15
- <b> FOR: </b>+ một khoảng thời gian : để nói
rằng một cái gì đó diễn ra bao lâu rồi
Ex : We walked for 2 hours to
reach the waterfall.
<i><b>10. Used to + V(bare form) </b></i>: diễn tả một
thói quen trong quá khứ nay khơng cịn
Ex: He used to play tennis.
* Note : Sự tương phản: USED TO +
V(bare form) (Đã từng )
BE / GET + USED
TO + NOUN PHRASE / GERUND
( Quen )
Ex: Ba was born in a famer family. He’s
used to working in the sun.
<i><b>4. Consolidation (3’)</b></i>
Some Structures in this lesson
T: asks Ss to repeat the structures in
front of the class.
Ss: listen and talk in front of the
class
<i><b>5. Homework: (1’)</b></i>
- Learn by heart the structures
- prepare the next revision
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 17</b>
<i><b>- Period: 53</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 17/12/2011</b>
<b>*Aim: </b>Listening for details and further
practice in adverbs of place,<i><b> Present </b></i>
<b>* Objective: By the end of </b>
the lesson, Ss will be able to
remember the structures
learned
<b>* Teaching aids: Textbook.</b>
<b>* Procedure: </b>
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ODER:</b> <b>(1’)</b>
<b>Greeting</b>
<b>Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP:</b>
( 5’)
T: asks Ss to repeat the
structures in the last lesson
<i><b>Modal verbs, Questions with</b></i>
<i><b>“WHY”</b><b> :</b><b> Past Simple Tense </b></i>
<i><b>( Thì quá khứ đơn</b><b> ) </b><b> </b></i>
Ss: think and aswer
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>*Warm up:</b></i> <i><b>(5’)</b></i>
<b>Jumble words:</b>
<b>1. rof For</b>
<b>2. inces Since</b>
<b>3. doog good </b>
<b>4. terteb better</b>
<b>5. readly already</b>
<i><b>* Presentation ( 30’)</b></i>
<i><b>11. Present perfect tense( Thì hiện tại hồn </b></i>
<i><b>thành )</b></i>
- Use :- Dùng để miêu tả một hành động
xảy ra trong quá khứ nhưng kết quả còn lưu
đến hiện tại
- Dùng để miêu tả một hành động
vừa mới xảy ra ( ta dùng với JUST)
- Dùng để miêu tả một hành động
được hoàn tất sớm hơn sự mong đợi (ta dùng
với ALREADY) Ex: I have already finished
this work.
- Dùng để miêu tả một hành động từ
trước đến giờ chưa hề hoặc không hề xảy ra
( ta dùng với EVER –NEVER) . Ex: Have
you ever been to Hue? I have never gone.
<b> - </b>Dùng để miêu tả một hành động đã
xảy ratrong quá khứ tính đến nay đã xảy ra
được bao lâu (FOR) hoặc đã xảy ra từ lúc
naøo (Since)
<b>* For : </b> Chỉ thời gian kéo dài bao lâu.
Ex: You have studied English for 4
years.
<b>* Since: </b> thời gian bắt đầu từ lúc nào
Ex: She has studied English since
2003.
<i><b>12. Comparison of adjectives and adverbs</b></i>
1. <b> So sánh bằng</b>
- Dạng khẳng định: <b> S + V + as + adj / </b>
<b>adv + as + Noun</b> Ex: Mai is as tall as
Lan .
- Dạng phủ định: <b>S + V + not + as / so + </b>
<b>adj / adv + as + Noun </b>Ex: Mai isn’t as/so
tall as Lan
2. <b> Similarity ( Sự tương đồng)</b> :<b> </b> Để diễn tả
sự tương đồng ,ta có thể dùng :
<b>- LIKE</b> ( giống, như )Ex: He ‘s like his
father.
- <b> THE SAME AS</b> ( giống như )
Ex: Your shirt is the same as Ba’s.
- <b> DIFFERENT FROM </b> ( khác với )
Ex: He’s different from his mother.
* Note : <b> “THE SAME + noun + AS</b>”cũng
được dùng để diễn tả sự tương đồng hay
bằng nhau.
Ex : He is the same age as my brother.
He’s as old as my brother.
<i><b>13- Present progressive Tense ( Thì hiện tại </b></i>
<i><b>tiếp diễn )</b></i>
- Use : Diễn tả một hành động xảy ra vào
đúng thời điểm nói.
-Form : + S + is / am/ are + V-ing + ………
Ex : I’m learning English now.
- S + is / am/ are + not + V-ing + ……
He isn’t learning English now.
? Is / Am / Are + S + V-ing + ………?
Is he reading books now?
chất đang diễn tiến của hành động ở ngay
lúc nói .
<i><b>14- Comparative and superlative adjectives (</b></i>
<i><b>So sánh hơn và hơn nhất )</b></i>
1. <b> So sánh hơn </b>
- Tính từ có một âm tiết : <b>Adjective –er + </b>
<b>than </b> Ex: I’m stronger than you.
- Tính từ có hai âm tiết trở lên: <b>More + adj </b>
<b>+than</b> Ex: My sister is more beautiful
than me.
2 <b>So sánh hơn nhất</b>
-Tính từ có một âm tiết : <b>The + Adj –est</b>
Ex: This tower is the tallest.
- Tính từ có hai âm tiết trở lên: <b>The + most </b>
<b>+ adj </b> Ex:Hoa is the most beautiful in
my class
Note : Một số tính từ bất qui tắc
Good - better - the best
Far - farther - the farthest/further-the
furthest
Bad - worse - the worst
<i><b>4. Consolidation (3’)</b></i>
Some Structures in this lesson
T: asks Ss to repeat the structures in
front of the class.
Ss: listen and talk in front of the
class
<i><b>5. Homework ( 1’)</b></i>
- Learn by heart the structures
- prepare the next revision
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 18</b>
<i><b>- Period: 54</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 20/12/2011</b>
<b>*Aim: Listening for details </b>
and further practice in
adverbs of place, Modal
<i><b>verbs, Questions with </b></i>
<i><b>“WHY”</b><b> :</b><b> Past Simple Tense </b></i>
<i><b>( Thì quá khứ đơn</b><b> ) </b><b> </b></i>
<b>* Objective: By the end of </b>
the lesson, Ss will be able to
remember the structures
learned
<b>* Teaching aids: Textbook.</b>
<b>* Procedure: </b>
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ODER:</b> <i><b>(1’)</b></i>
<b>Greeting</b>
<b>Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP:</b>
(5’)
T: asks Ss to repeat the structures
in the last lesson Present simple
<i><b>tense, (not ) adjective + enough </b></i>
<i><b>+ infinitive and Near Future: Be </b></i>
<i><b>going to </b><b> ( thì tương lai gần </b><b> ) </b></i>
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>*Warm up: ( 5’)</b></i>
<b>Write past participle </b>
<b>Be - been ; bring - brought</b>
<b>Buy – bought ; go – gone</b>
<b>Write – wrote ; cut – cut ; read - read</b>
<i><b>* Presentation ( 30’)</b></i>
<i><b>* Modal verbs </b></i>
- Form : + S + modal verb + V +
<b>……….</b>
Ex : I can sing very well.
- S + modal verb + not + V + ………
Ex : Hoa may not come to the party
tomorrow.
<b>? Modal verb + S + V + ………….? </b>
Ex : May I come in ?
- Modal verb : must, ought to, have to,
should
<b>* MUST : </b>là khiếm trợ động từ ( a modal
) diễn tả sự bắt buộc hay sự cần thiết có
<b>* HAVE TO</b> : diễn tả sự bắt buộc hay sự
cần thiết có tính khách quan – do yếu tố
bên ngoài.
Ex: Your eyes are weak. You <b>have to</b>
wear glasses.
<b>* OUGHT TO + V</b>(base form) (neân):
diễn tả lời khuyên. Ex: We <b>ought to</b>
obey our parents.
<b>* SHOULD</b>: diễn tả lời khuyên Ex:
You should help the needed children.
<b>* MAY / CAN / COULD : </b>được dùng để
diễn tả lời yêu cầu hay đề nghị
- Yêu cầu sự giúp đỡ: <b> Can / Could + </b>
<b>you + V + O / A,please ?(</b>Ex: Can you
help me ,please.)
- Đề nghị giúp ai: <b>May + I + V + O/A</b>
<b>?; Let + me + V + O/A. ; Do you </b>
<b>need any help? Shall + I + V + O / </b>
<b>A ? </b>Ex: May I help you?
<b>* WILL</b>: dùng để diễn tả lời yêu cầu ,
đề nghị hoặc lời hứa
<b>- Will + you + V + O + A / M , </b>
<b>please? </b> Diễn tả lời yêu cầu.
T: reviews the structure
<i><b>verbs </b></i>
Ss: listen and give the use of the
structure
T: Explains again and gives
Example
Ss: listen and write in their book.
T: gives Ss some exrcises
Ss: do them in front of class
*
<i><b>sentences so that it has the </b></i>
<i><b>same meaning as the first one. </b></i>
1. I suggest you get up early.
→You
shouldn’t……….
2. Why don’t you finish the
work soon?
→You
shouldn’t……….
3. Why don’t we phone her?
→Let’s
………...
4. You should do more
exercises.
→ Why don’t
……….
Ex: Will you turn of the fan, please
? I’m cold.
- <b>I + will + V + O + A / M ? </b> dieãn
tả lời đề nghị làm điều gì cho ai .
- <b>S + will + V + O + A / M ? </b> dieãn
tả lời hứa . Ex: I’m sory. This won’t
happen again.
<b>* Would / Do you + mind + . . . + ? </b>
diễn tả lời yêu cầu lịch sự .
<b>- Would you mind + V-ing ( gerund) ? </b>
Ex:Would you mind <b>telling </b>me the result
of the exam.
* <i><b> Questions with “WHY”</b></i>:<i><b> </b></i> Dùng để hỏi
về nguyên nhân hay lý do
<i><b>Why + do / aux. V </b></i>
<i><b>+ S + Vm + </b></i>
<i><b>O . . . ?</b></i>
Ex: <b>Why do</b> they cover the
electric sockets?
Để trả lời cho câu hỏi với WHY ta có thể
dùng :
- Mệnh đề với “because”. Ex: Why do
you get up early? – Because I want to do
exercise.
- Cụm động từ nguyên mẫu . Ex: Why do
you do exercise? – To keep healthy.
* <i><b> Past Simple Tense (Thì quá khứ đơn)</b></i>
- Use : Diễn tả hành động xảy ra và kết
thúc tại một thời điểm xác định ở quá khứ
- Form: + S + V-ed(regular) / V2 ( column irregular) +
………… Ex : - He arrived here yesterday.
- S + didn’t + V + ……….
- She didn’t go to school
yesterday.
? Did + S + V + ……… ?
- Did you clean this table?
định ở quá khứ : <b>last </b>week / month / year
. . ., a week / 3 days / 5 months . . . ,
yesterday, <b>yesterday</b> morning / evening,
<b>In</b>+ năm, <b>from </b>2000 <b>to</b>2005
- Cách đọc các đông từ ở quá khứ đơn
với “ ED”:
+ “ ED”: được đọc là /t/ khi những động
từ nguyên mẫu có âm tận cùng là /f/,
Ex : laughed , asked , helped ,
watch , pushed , dressed , ………
+ “ ED”: đươcï đọc là /id/ khi những động
từ nguyên mẫu có âm tận cùng là /d/
và /t/
Ex : needed , wanted , waited , ……..
+ “ ED”: đươcï đọc là /d/ khi những động
từ ngun mẫu có âm tận cùng là các âm
cịn lại
Ex : enjoyed , saved , filled ,……….
<i><b>4. Consolidation (3’)</b></i>
Some Structures in this lesson
T: asks Ss to repeat the structures in
front of the class.
Ss: listen and talk in front of the
class
<i><b>5. Homework: (1’)</b></i>
- Learn by heart the structures
- prepare the next revision
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b></b>
<b></b>
<b>---</b>
<b>--- Week: 18</b>
<i><b>- Period: 55</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>-Preparing date: 21/12/2011</b>
<b>*Aim: Listening for details and further </b>
practice in adverbs of place,Preposition
<i><b>of time ( </b><b> Giới từ chỉ thời gian</b><b> ) : at, </b></i>
in ,on, from . . . to, for, by; Used to +
<i><b>V(bare form) :</b></i>
<b>* Objective: By the end of </b>
the lesson, Ss will be able to
remember the structures
learned
<b>* Teaching aids: Textbook.</b>
<b>* Procedure: </b>
<b>1.CLASS</b>
<b>ODER:</b> <i><b>(1’)</b></i>
<b>Greeting</b>
<b>Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP:</b>
(5’)
T: asks Ss to repeat the
structures in the last lesson ,
<i><b>Modal verbs, Questions with</b></i>
<i><b>“WHY”</b><b> :</b><b> Past Simple Tense </b></i>
<i><b>( Thì quá khứ đơn</b><b> ) </b><b> </b></i>
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>*Warm up: ( 5’)</b></i>
- Jumble words:
enbe - been ;gruothb - brought
<b>uohtgb – bought ; engo – gone</b>
<b>Woret – wrote ;tcu – cut ; aerd - read</b>
<i><b>* Presentation ( 30’)</b></i>
<b>* Preposition of time ( Giới từ chỉ thời </b>
<b>gian ) : </b>at, in ,on, from . . . to, for, by
- <b>AT : </b> + một điểm thời gian cụ thể
Ex : We have class at one o’clock.
+ night
Ex : I sleep at night.
<b>- IN : </b>+ tháng/năm cụ thể
Ex : I was born 1994
+ the morning/afternoon / evening
Ex : We have class in the morning.
<b>- ON: </b> + ngày trong tuần
Ex : We have class on Monday.
+ ngày tháng năm
Ex: I was born on April 6, 2006
<b>- FROM </b>+ một điểm thời gian + <b>TO </b>+
một điểm thời gian
Ex: We have class from 7.00 to 10.15
- <b> FOR: </b>+ một khoảng thời gian : để nói
rằng một cái gì đó diễn ra bao lâu rồi
Ex : We walked for 2 hours to reach the
waterfall.
* <i><b> Used to + V(bare form) </b></i>: diễn tả một
thói quen trong quá khứ nay khơng cịn
Ex: He used to play tennis.
* Note : Sự tương phản: USED TO +
V(bare form) (Đã từng )
BE / GET + USED TO + NOUN
PHRASE / GERUND ( Quen )
Ex: Ba was born in a famer family. He’s
used to working in the sun.
structure
T: Explains again and gives
Example
Ss: listen and write in their
book.
T: reviews the structure
<i><b>+ V(bare form)</b></i>
Ss: listen and give the use of the
structure
T: Explains again and gives
Example
Ss: listen and write in their
book.
T: gives Ss some exercise
Ss: do them in front of class
<i><b>4. Consolidation (3’)</b></i>
Some Structures in this lesson
T: asks Ss to repeat the structures in
front of the class.
Ss: listen and talk in front of the
class
<i><b>5. Homework: (1’)</b></i>
- Learn by heart the structures
- prepare the next revision
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 18</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Preparing date:</b>
<b>- Period: 54</b> <b> - </b>
<b>Teaching date:</b>
<b>THE FIRST SEMESTER</b>
<b>EXAMINATION</b>
<b>DINH AN HIGH SCHOOL </b>
<b>Full </b>
<b>name: ... </b>
……… School
<b>year: 2009 - 2010</b>
<i><b>Class: 8 / ... </b></i>
<i><b>ENGLISH 8 Time allowed: 45 minutes</b></i>
<b>Điểm</b> <b>Giám thị:………. </b>
<b>ký tên </b>
<b>Giám khảo:………. </b>
<b>ký tên</b>
<b>I. LISTENING: </b>
<i><b>Listen and fill in the missing words : (1 pt)</b></i>
Yesterday, I had an English (1)………
but I got up late. Because I studied the (2)
……... and did my homework late. When I
got up, it was 7:00 o’clock. I changed my
clothes and took my school-bag. Then I
tried to (3)……… as fast as I could.
Luckily, I still(4)………<i><b>…</b></i> at school on
time.
<b>II. READING : </b>
<i><b>Read the text and decide True (T) or False</b></i>
<i><b>(F) for the statements below: (2 pts)</b></i>
It was the first time Jim went to Ho Chi
Minh City with his parents. When the plane
landed at Tan Son Nhat airport, the day was
fine. There was a bright sun and the sky
was cloudless and blue. It is said that Ho
Chi Minh City is the city of sunshine.
The family took a taxi to the Rex Hotel,
a very big hotel in the city centre. After
checking in, they went upstairs to their
room on the fifth floor. Jim was eager to
see the sight of the city. Through the
window of the bedroom, he could see the
beautiful picture of the city. It was
marvelous to see the city sparkling in
colorful lights at night.
<i><b>* Notice: eager(adj): </b>háo hứng, hăm hở,</i>
<i>ham muốn / <b>marvelous(adj): </b>kỳ diệu,</i>
<i>tuyệt diệu</i>
sparkling(adj): <i>lấp lánh, lóng </i>
<i>lánh</i>
<i><b> True/ False statements:</b></i>
_____ 1. Jim visited Ho Chi Minh city
when it was cloudy.
_____ 2. He has come Ho Chi Minh city
before.
_____ 3. He and his parents stayed in one
of his relative’s house.
_____ 4. He enjoyed looking at the city at
night.
<b>III. LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>
<i><b>Circle the best option A, B, C or D</b></i>
<i><b>to complete each of the following</b></i>
<i><b>sentences. (2 pts)</b></i>
1. Have you ______ any news about Lan
since her bike accident?
A. hear B. hearing
C. to hear D. heard
2. Hoa used to ______________ long hair.
A. has B. have
C. had D.
to have
3. They don’t want ______ to the market
now.
A. go B. to go
C. going D. went
<b>PHÁCH</b>
<b> </b>
4. The girl enjoys ______ her fitness
exercise after classes.
A. doing B. to do
C. do D. did
<b>5. I have known her _______ two years.</b>
<b>A. for</b> <b>B. since</b> <b>C.</b>
<b>with</b> <b>D. within</b>
<b>6. Ba is not old enough______________ a</b>
<b>car.</b>
<b>A. drive</b> <b>B. drives</b> <b> C.</b>
<b>7. They should go to the movies</b>
<b>______________ 6:30 and 7:00.</b>
<b>A. on</b> <b> B. at </b> <b>C.</b>
<b>between</b> <b>D. in</b>
<b>8. I’ll write to Mai in order to ________</b>
<b>her to my birthday party.</b>
<b>A. inviting B. invited</b>
<b>C. invite</b> <b>D. to invite</b>
<i><b>ƒ Matching each questions in column A</b></i>
<i><b>with a suitable answer in column B. ( 2</b></i>
<i><b>pts)</b></i>
<b> A</b>
<b> 1. Where did your Grandma use to live?</b>
<b>2. Which subject do you need to improve?</b>
<b>3. Could you help me, please?</b>
<b>4. When do they plant trees along the</b>
<b>streets?</b>
<b>IV. WRITING: </b>
<i><b>Rewrite the following sentences</b></i>
<i><b>beginning with the cues given ( 3 pts)</b></i>
<b>1. They didn’t often go to the park</b>
<b>every Sunday.</b>
<b>→</b> <b>They</b> <b>didn’t</b> <b>use</b>
<b>………</b>
<b>………….</b>
<b>2. Why don’t you go and see the</b>
<b>dentist ? </b>
<b>→</b> <b>You</b> <b>ought</b>
<b>………</b>
<b>……….</b>
<b>3. “ You shouldn’t listen to that</b>
<b>kind of music , Tim”</b>
<b>→ Tim’s mother told him</b>
<b>………</b>
<b>……</b>
<b>4. “ Can you buy me some stamps,</b>
<b>Hoa?” </b>
<b>→</b> <b>Mai</b> <b>asked</b> <b>Hoa</b>
<b>………</b>
<b>………</b>
<b>5. Hung is 10 years old. Hoang is 8</b>
<b>years old.</b>
<b>→</b> <b>Hoang</b> <b>is</b>
<b>………</b>
<b>………</b>
<b>6. Hoa doesn’t speak English so </b>
<b>well as Lan.</b>
<b>→ Lan speaks </b>
<b>………</b>
<b>……….</b>
<b>- THE END </b>
<b>---đề kiểm tra hk I - Môn tiếng anh 8 </b>
<b>NĂM HỌC: 2009 - 2010</b>
1. Ma trËn
<b>Chủ đề</b>
<b>NhËn biÕt</b> <b>Th«ng hiĨu</b>
TN TL TN
<i><b>I. Listening</b></i> 4
1.0
<i><b>II. Reading</b></i> 4
2,0
<i><b>III. Language</b></i>
<i><b> focus</b></i>
8
2.0
4
2.0
<i><b>IV. Writing</b></i>
<b>Tæng</b> <b>8</b>
<b>2,0</b>
<b>12</b>
<b> 5,0</b>
<i><b>2. Đáp án và hớng dẫn chÊm:</b></i>
<b> Tổng số 1,0 điểm. Mỗi câu điền từ</b>
<b>đúng đợc 0,25 điểm.</b>
<i><b>Tapescript:</b></i>
Yesterday, I had an English <i><b>exam</b></i>
but I got up late. Because I studied the
<i><b>lessons</b></i> and did my homework late. When
I got up, it was 7:00 o’clock. I changed my
1. exam 2. lesson 3. run 4.
arrived
<i>II READING</i>
<b>Tổng số 2.0 điểm. Mỗi câu đúng đợc</b>
<b>0,5 điểm.</b>
<b>1. F</b> <b>2. F</b> <b>3. F</b> <b>4. T</b>
<b>III. LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>
<b>Tổng số 2,0 điểm. Mỗi từ chọn đúng</b>
<b>đợc 0,25 điểm.</b>
<b>1. D 2. B </b> <b>3. B 4. A </b>
<b>5. A 6. C</b> <b>7. C</b> <b>8. C</b>
<b>* Nối câu : Tổng số 2,0 điểm , mỗi ý</b>
<b>đúng được 0,5 điểm</b>
<b>1. C </b> <b>2.A </b> <b>3. B</b> <b>4.D</b>
<b>IV. WRITING</b>
<b>Tổng số 3,0 điểm. Mỗi ý đợc 0,5 </b>
<b>điểm.</b>
<b>1. They didn’t use to go to the park </b>
<b>every Sunday.</b>
<b>2. You ought to go and see the </b>
<b>dentist.</b>
<b>3. Tim’s mother told him that he </b>
<b>shouldn’t listen to that kind of </b>
<b>music.</b>
<b>4. Mai asked Hoa to buy her some </b>
<b>stamps.</b>
<b>5. Hoang is younger than Hung.</b>
<b>6. Lan speaks English better than </b>
<b>Hoa</b>
<b>- THE END </b>
<b>---GV RA ĐỀ : TỀ XỐN</b>
<b>TRƯỜNG THPT ĐỊNH AN</b>
**********************************
****************************
<b>- Week: 20</b>
<i><b>Period: 58</b></i>
<b> -Preparing date: </b>
<b>02/1/2012</b>
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Reading for details about
the situations which require first - aid.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss can know what they would do
in the situations which require first-aid.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1. CLASS ODER:</b> <b>(2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking </b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2. CHECK UP: </b>
3. presentation :
<b>Content</b>
<b>Warm up : Kim,<sub>s game (10’)</sub></b>
( Getting started )
<i>Suggested answers :</i>
<i><b>1. emergency room 2. sterile dressing </b></i>
<i><b>3. medicated oil 4. ice 5. water pack </b></i>
<i><b>6. alcohol</b></i>
- Have them discuss and write down what
they would do in these situations which
require first – aid
- Call on some groups to give their answers
and correct
<i>Possible answers</i> :
<i>a. I’ll use cold water to ease the pain. I’ll</i>
<i>take her to the nearest clinic. I’ll get her an</i>
<i>ice pack..</i>
<i>b. Let her stand straight. Use some absobent</i>
<i>cotton to cover her bleed nose for some</i>
<i>minutes.</i>
<i>c. Wash the cut with alcohol to sterilize it.</i>
<i>Cover it with a bandage and take him to the</i>
<i>d. Wash the sting with alcohol, then rob</i>
<i>some ointment on it.</i>
<i><b>* Pre-reading: ( 13’)</b></i>
□ Pre-teach vocab:
- ambulance: xe cứu thương
- emergency: ca cấp cứu
- unconcious ≠ concious : bất tỉnh # tỉnh
- (to) bleed (v): chảu máu
- wound (n): vết thương
- pressure: sức ép
- tight ≠ loose (adj): chặt # lỏng
<i>□<b> gap-fill prediction:</b></i>
There was an emergency at lan's school. A
student ... 1 .... off her bike and hit her head
on the road. She was ... 2... but she cut her
head and the. ... 3... was ... 4... badly. Lan
telephoned Bach Mai Hospital and asked the
nurse to send an ... 5... to Quang Trung
school. Lan was asked to keep the student ...
6... while waiting for the ambulance".
<i><b>* While-reading: (10’)</b></i>
Read the dialogue and check Ss' prediction
<i><b>-> Key : 1. fell 2. conscious 3. cut 4. </b></i>
<i><b>bleeding 5. ambulance 6. awake</b></i>
<i><b>* Post-reading: (7’)</b></i>
Read the dialogue again and select the topics
covered in the dialogue. (page 81).
-> Key: a. b. c. e. f
<i><b>* Homework (3’)</b></i>
- Write a story using the information from
the dialogue begin their story with:
<i>Yesterday there was an emerge of at....</i>
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
****************************
***************************
<b>- Week: 20</b>
<i><b>-Period: 59</b></i>
<b> -Preparing</b>
<b>date:04/01/2012</b>
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Practice in making and
responding to offers, promises and
requests. Listening to a paragraph
for details about the activities taking place
in an emergency room.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss can make and respond requests,
offers and promises.
- Help Ss known how
to listen for details.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook,
pictures on page 82.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: ( 1’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (5’)</b>
T: asks Ss to read the dialogue last
lesson and write vocabularies.
3.presentation :
<b>Contents</b> <b>Teacher’s & Students’ activities</b>
<i><b>ª Warm up: - Brainstorming (5’)</b></i>
<i><b>+ Possible answers:</b></i>
<i>- have a nose bleed</i>
- Have Ps work in groups to write as
many words as possible about the
situations that require first-aid.
- Call some Ps to give the situations
they know.
- Ask Ps some questions:
What would you do if you have a
<i>- have a burn</i>
<i>- have a cut</i>
<i>- have a bee sting</i>
<i>- have a fainting</i>
<i>- accident</i>
<i><b>† Pre - speaking ( 10’)</b></i>
Introduce the topic of the speaking and
some models sentences .:
1. Set the scene :
a. I want you to get me a bandage . How
can I say ?
b. I would like you to come to my
party . How can I say ?
c. I tell my mother that I will surely
finish my work before bedtime . How
can I say ?
a. Will you ( please ) get me a bandage ?
b. Would you like to come to my party ?
c. I promise I will finish my homework
before bedtime .
=> Concept checking
- After formulating the model
sentences , elicit some more phrases
with the same use from students .
1.1 To make a request :
<b>Will </b>
<b>Would you ( please ) + V ……. ?</b>
<b>Could </b>
<b>Can </b>
<i>Reponses</i> :
<b>+ Sure / Ok / All right . </b>
<b>- I am sorry . I can / I am afraid not </b>
1.2 To make an offer
<b>Will / Won,<sub>t you </sub></b>
<b> Shall I + V </b>
<b>………..?</b>
<b> Can I </b>
<b>Would you like + to V </b>
<b>What can I do / get for you ? </b>
<b>Can I get you ………..? </b>
<i>Responses</i> :
<b>+ Yes , please . / That would be nice . </b>
<b>- No , thank you . </b>
1.3 To make a promise
<b>I promise I will / I will not ………..</b>
nose bleed?/ a burn?/ a bee sting?/...
- Ask Ss some questions to elicit the
models
- Have Ss repeat 2 or 3 times before
writing them on the board ( underline
the key words )
- Get Ss to work out the rules for
themselves by asking questions .
<b>I will ………... I promise .</b>
<b>I promise to …………...</b>
<i>Reponses : </i>
<b>I hope . / Good . / I am glad . / Do not </b>
<b>forget</b>
ª While - speaking : (5’)
ª Matching :
1. The girl has a burn on her hand .
2. The girl has a bad fever .
3. The boy has just broken the vase .
4. The boy has a headache .
5. The boy has a snake bite .
- Give feedback : 1.a 2. d 3. e 4. b 5.
<i><b>c </b></i>
2. Picture Drill :
- Identify the situations in the pictures
Picture
a) -> request
“ b) -> offer / request
“ c) -> offer / request
“ d) -> offer
“ e) -> promise
+ Model : Could you give me a
bandage , please ?
Sure . Here you are
<b>ª Post - speaking : ( 5’)</b>
Pair work ( closed pairs )
* <i>Suggested answers</i> :
b. A : Can I get you some water /
medicine ?
B : Yes, please .
c. A : Can I get you some bandage ?
B : That would be nice
d. A : You must have a fever . Can I get
you some medicine / water ?
B : NO , I am fine . Thank you .
e. A : I promise I will not play soccer in
the house again .
B : I hope so .
ª Pre- listening : (5’)
Introduce the topic of the listening and
some new words
1. Pre teach vocabulary :
- an eye chart ( using picture )
-> eye sight
- a parademic : he takes care of patients
but he is not a doctor nor a nurse
- Ask Ss to copy down .
- Hang the chart with the statements
on the board .
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures ( page
82 ) and match the situations with the
statements .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate
the exchanges in front of class .
- Get Ss in turn to practice all the
exchanges
- Monitor and correct , encourage Ss
to make sentences for themselves
- Collect their ideas and write them
on the boards
- a wheelchair ( using the picture )
- a crutch -> crutches ( picture )
* Checking technique : What and
<b>where </b>
2. Matching :
- Give feedback
A -> ambulance D -> eye chart
B -> wheelchair E -> scale
C -> crutches F -> stretcher
ª While – listening : ( 5’)
1. Order Prediction
<b>Guess</b> <b>key</b>
ambulance
wheelchair
crutches
eye chart
scale
stretcher
3
2
6
4
5
1
- Stick the chart with the statements on
the board :
1. A doctor is wheeling a patient into the
emergency room .
2. The patient,<sub>s head is bandaged</sub>
3. A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with
a patient sitting on it .
4. The eye chart consists of 28 letters
ranging in the different size .
5. The baby,<sub>s mother is trying to stop the</sub>
nurse from weighing her baby .
<i><b>give feedback:</b></i>
1. False ( a parademic not a doctor )
2. True
3. False ( empty wheelchair not with a
patient )
4. True
5 . False ( stop her baby from crying )
- Have Ss write the story about the
activities in the picture , using the
Present Continuous .
“ This is the emergency room in a
large hospital ….. “
-> Have Ss copy
- Ask Ss to look at the picture in their
books again and match the letter
A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct words
in the box .
- Call on some volunteers from each
group to demonstrate in front of
class .
- Rub out the letter ( A ,B …) but
leave the words .
- Tell Ss they are going to listen to a
paragraph about the activities taking
place in an emergency room which
contains the words on the board
- Put the words in the table
- Have Ss copy and guess the order of
- Play the tape and ash Ss to listen
- Ask Ss to give their answers and
correct
- Ask Ss to read the statements
carefully and check if they understand
the meaning of the statements
- Have Ss work in pairs to decide
which of the statements is true and
which is false .
- Play the tape and have Ss listen ( 2
or 3 times )
<b>ª Homework </b><b> ( 1’)</b>
**********************************
****************
<b>Week 20</b>
<i><b>- Period: 60</b></i>
<b> -Preparing </b>
<b>date:06/1/2012</b>
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Reading for the
instructions about some more situations
requiring first-aid.
* Objective: - At the end of the
lesson, Ss can use "in order to and so as
to" to indicate purposes.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: ( 2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to practice speaking
lesson in front of the class.
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b>
ªWarm up : (5’) Bingo
<i><b>( burn , cut , bee sting , snake bite , fainting , </b></i>
<i><b>shock , nose bleed ) </b></i>
ªPre – reading : (15’)
Introduce the topic of reading passage and some
new words to Ss .
1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- to lie flat ( mime / drawing )
- to elevate >< to lower
- a victim : a person who needs first aid
- to overheat : make something too hot
- tissue damage = tổn hại mô
- to ease = to stop
* Checking technique : Rub out and remember
2. Network
ª While – reading : ( 10’)
1. Matching :
- Ask Ss to read the statements / page 84 and
match tree Leadings A , B , C to them .
<i><b>Give feedback A -> a , c , e B -> b C -> d </b></i>
<i><b>- Give feedback :</b></i>
<b>Cases</b> <b>Do</b> <b>Don,<sub>t</sub></b>
<i><b>Faintin</b></i>
<i><b>g </b></i>
<b>- Leave the patient</b>
<b>lying flat </b>
<b>- Elevate the </b>
<b>patients,<sub> feet or </sub></b>
<b>lower his / her </b>
<b>head .</b>
<b>- Do not force </b>
<b>him / her to sit </b>
<b>or stand .</b>
<i><b>Shock</b></i>
<b>- Give him / her a </b>
<b>cup of tea when he</b>
<b>/ she revives . </b>
<b>- Do not </b>
<b>overheat the </b>
<b>- Do not give </b>
burn fainting
First-aid
<b>the victim any </b>
<b>food or drink </b>
<b>or drug . </b>
<i><b>Burns </b></i>
<b>- Cool the burn </b>
<b>immediately to </b>
<b>minimize the </b>
<b>tissue damage . </b>
<b>- Put the affected </b>
<b>part under a </b>
<b>running cold tap .</b>
<b>- Ease the pain </b>
<b>with ice or cold </b>
<b>water packs .</b>
<b>- Cover the burned</b>
- Ask Ss to work in groups to continue discussing
how to give first aid .
- Call on some volunteers from each group to
demonstrate in front of class .
ª Homework : (2’)
Remind Ps to study at home and prepare for the
next lesson.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
****************************
************
<b>-Preparing date:10/1/2012</b>
<b>- Week: 21</b>
<i><b>- Period: 61</b></i>
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Writing a thank-you note.
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss know how to write a thank-you
note.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to read the paragraph
and answer the questions, write the
vocabularies
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b>
ª Warm up: (5’) Shark attack
_ _ _ _ ( ease ) <sub></sub>
<b>ª Pre-writing: ( 10’)</b>
<i><b>1. Vocabulary:</b></i>
- to thank sb for sth
- to cheer sb up
- to come over
<i><b>2. True / False </b></i>
<i>a. Nga writes to thank Hoa for some</i>
<i>candy.</i>
<i>b. Hoa’s gift cheered Nga up</i>
<i>3.Nga’d like Hoa to see her at the</i>
<i>hospital.</i>
<i>d. Nga is very bored now.</i>
<i>e. Nga writes the letter at the hospital.</i>
+ Answer key:
a. False -> Flowers ( not candy)
b. True
c. False -> at her house
- Draw the figures of sea wave,
steps, a boy/girl, a shark.
- Have Ps complete these gaps to
make a meaningful word.
* Pre teach new vocabulary.
- Guide Ps to read carefully
- Checking by
* Set the scene:
<i>go to hospital. After she left the</i>
<i>hospital, she wrote a thank-you</i>
<i>note to Hoa</i>
<i>she write?</i>
* True or False Predictions
- Hang a poster with the
statements on the board.
e. False -> at her house
<b>ª While writing: ( 15’)</b>
<i><b>3. Questions and answers.</b></i>
* Sample letter:
Dear ...
<i>I want to thank you for the lovely</i>
<i>flowers you aent me while I was in</i>
<i>hospital. They helped to cheer me up on</i>
<i>several groomy days because they</i>
<i>reminded me of a good friend’s</i>
<i>thoughtfulness.</i>
<i>I’m fine now, and my family has decided</i>
<i>to go on a picnic 6to my native village</i>
<i>next weekend and I can’t help</i>
<i>remembering you. Will you join us? I</i>
<i>think you sau “Yes” to me. Right?</i>
<i>I’d love to see you then</i>
<i>Your friend,</i>
<i>Nga</i>
<i>* Dear...</i>
<i>I have asked afew friends of our class to</i>
<i>come over to my house for a </i>
<i>get-together next Wednesday, May the tenth</i>
<i>at ten o’clock. Will you join us?</i>
<i>I’m certain we’ll have much fun. We’re</i>
<i>looking forward to seeing you. Do try to</i>
<i>make it. </i>
<i>Affectionately</i>
<i>....</i>
<b>ª Post writing: (3’)</b>
Read their writing in front of the board.
<b>ª Homework: (2’)</b>
- Remind Ps to study at home and
prepare
- Have Ps read the statements then
decide which is true and which is
false then correct the false ones
again
+ Have Ps read the questions then
answer the questions in order to
write a thank-you note.
<i>? What did your friend give/send</i>
<i>you?</i>
<i>? On what occasion?</i>
<i>? What was/were it/they like?</i>
<i>? How did you feel when you</i>
<i>receive the present?</i>
<i>? How do you feel now?</i>
<i>? Do you want to invite your</i>
<i>friend to somewhere?</i>
<i>? If so, then when?</i>
<i>? How will you contact your</i>
<i>friend?</i>
* Use the same format to write
another letter to another friend for
other occasions.
- Call some Ps to read their writing
in front of the board.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
**********************************
******************
<b>-Preparing date:13/1/2012</b>
<b>- Week: 21</b>
<i><b> Period: 59</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>I. Objectives</b>
<b> By the end of the lesson Ps are able to</b>
make and response to requests, offers
and promises . Listen and name the
places and objectcs in the hospital.
<b>II. Contents. </b>Vocabulary: eye chart,
parademic, wheelchair, stretcher, crutch
<b>III/ Teaching aids: Books and</b>
notebooks, cassette, gap fill chart.
Pictures on page 80.
<b>IV/ Procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to write or read the
letter in front of the class.
3.presentation :
<b>Contents</b>
<i><b>ª Warm up </b></i><b> 5’</b>
+ Ps go to the bb to read their letter in front
of the class.
<b>ª Presentation: (25’)</b>
ª Language focus
<i>1. In order to / so as to </i>
Match one part of a sentence from column A
with another part in column B. Then write a
complete sentence by using <i>in order to/ so as</i>
<i>to</i>
<b>ª Practice:</b>
1. f 4. E 5. A
2. c 3. b 6. d
<i>2. Future simple </i>
1. will 4. Shall
2. will 5. Will
3. won’t 6. will
<i>3. Making requests, offers & promises with “</i>
<i>will ”</i>
b. My book is on the floor. Will you give it
to me please?
c. Will you answer the telephone, please ?
d. Will you turn on TV, please ?
e. I am thirsty. Will you pour a glass of water
for me?
f. Will you get me a cushion, please?
<i>4. Work with a parter: </i>
a. Will you emplty the garbage can, please?
I will paint the door tomorrow
c. Will you study harder, please?
- I will study harder. I promise
d. Will you carry the bag for me, please ?
- Shall I carry the bag for you?
e. Will you hang the washing, please ?
Shall I hang the washing for you?
f. Will you cut the grass, please?
- Shall I cut the grass for you?
- I’ll cut the grass tomorrow
<b>ª Production: (3’)</b>
- Correct any mistakes if necessary.
- Have Ps make requests, offers and promises
in the class using the real situations.
<b>ª Homework: (2’)</b>
- Remind Ps to study at home and prepare for
lesson 10 - Recycling.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
**********************************
**********************************
**
<b>- Week: 21</b>
<b>-Preparing date: 15/1/2012 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 60</b></i>
<b> </b>
* Aim: - To give information about
the environment problems.
* Objective: Ss will be able to do
something to protect the environment and
save natural resources.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook,
posters.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to talk and write the
structures in front of the class.
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b> <b>T's activties & St’s activities</b>
<b>Warm - up : ( 5’)</b>
(Brainstorm)
Reuse plastic bags.
<b>* Pre-reading: ( 10’)</b>
□ Pre-teach vocabulary:
- representative: người đại diện
- (to) protect: to keep so/ sth safe from
danger.
- natural resources (coal, mines, oil,
gold,...)
- (to) contact: (to) communicate with.
□ Checking techniques:
<i><b>Jumbled words.</b></i>
□ True/ False predictions:
1. Freinds of the Earth is an
organiration to help peope make
friends with each other.
2. Miss Blake asks the students to
remember 3 things: reduce, reuse,
recycle.
3. Reduce means buying the products
which are overpacked.
4. We cannot reuse things like
envelopes glass, plastic bottles, old
plastic bags.
5. Miss Blake says that we should use
cloth bags and shouldn't use plastic
bags at all.
6. recycling means not just throwing
things away but trying and finding
another use for them.
T:Collect the ideas from the students:
Ss: Think of ways to reduce the
amount of garbage.
- Give feedback.
T: Present new words on the board.
Ss:Listen and repeat.
- Copy down.
T: Has ss copy
- Guide ss to read them in chorus.
Ss:Read the words in chrus.
T: Present the Jumbled words on the
board.
Ss: Rewrite the words in the right
order.
T: Asks ss to listen the situation.
Ss: Listen to the situation
T:Write the Ss' guesses on the board.
Ss:Work in pairs to decide if the
statements are true or false.
<b>* While-reading: ( 15’)</b>
□ Read the dialogue and check their
prediction.
□ Correct the false statements.
<i><b>* key:</b></i>
<i>a. Reduce means not buying products </i>
<i>which are overpackaged</i>
<i>b. We can reuse things like envelopes, </i>
<i>glass, plastic bottles and old plastic </i>
<i>bags</i>
<i>c. Recycle means not just throwing </i>
<i>things away. Try and find another use </i>
<i>for them.</i>
<i>d. We can look for information on </i>
<i>recycling things by having a contact </i>
<i>with an organization like Friend of the</i>
<i>earth, going to the local library or </i>
<i>asking your family and friends</i>
<i>e. (Sts’ answer) Because they could </i>
<i>not be self-destroyed/ self- demolished</i>
<b>* Post-reading: ( 3’)</b>
* Discussion
<i>- How to protect our environment?</i>
<b>* Home work : (2’)</b>
- Remind Ps to study at home and
prepare new lesson.
T: Monitor
Ss:Read the dialogue and check their
predictions correct the false
statements.
- Practise the dialogue
- Have Ps work in groups to give their
ideas about how to protect the
environment.
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 22</b>
- Preparing date:
<i><b>- Period: 64</b></i>
<b> </b>
<i><b>Ways to reduce the </b></i>
<i><b>amount of garbage</b></i>
* Aim: To help ss practice in giving
and responding to instructions and
listening for specifi information about
making compost.
* Objective: - Ss can give and
respond to instructions.
* Teaching aids: - Pictures, a
mapped dialogue chart.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to read the dialoge and
answer the quesstions , write
vocabularies.
<b> 3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>I.New words:</b>
<i>- plastic (n): nhựa</i>
<i>- metal (n):kim loại</i>
<i>- fabric (n):vải </i>
<i>- leather (n): da</i>
<i>- compost (n): phân xanh</i>
<i><b>*Which group each iterm belongs to:</b></i>
+ Paper: <i>used paper, old newspapers, </i>
<i>books, paper boxes,…</i>
+ Glass: <i>bottles, glasses, jars,…</i>
+ Plastic: <i>plastic bags/ bottles</i>…
+ Metal: <i>food cans, drinking cans,</i>
+ Vegetable matter: <i>fruit peels, </i>
<i>vegetables</i>
+ Fabric: <i>clothes, pieces of material</i>,..
<b>* Warm up: ( 3’)</b>
- Introduce the lesson
<b>*1</b>
+
- T shows the picture and asks some
questions:
+ What are they? (They are garbage
such as: paper, glass, plastic…..)
+ Why do we need to group those
things? (in order to reuse and recycle)
- gives some newwords and guides Ss
to read twice
- Call Ss to read twice
- Check and correct
-- Remark
+ Leather: <i>shoes, sandals, school bags</i>
<b>II. Practice:Asking & answering</b>
Eg1:
- Which group do plastic bags belong
to?
- Put them in “ plastic ”
- What can we do with those bags ?
- We can reuse them. (etc..)
<b>Eg2: - Are sandals “leather”?</b>
- That’s right.
- What will we do with them?
- We can collect and recycle them.
Eg: We can collect and recycle old
newspapers, used papers.(etc)
<b>I.Newwords</b>
- Grain (n): hạt
- Heap (n): một đóng
- sunlight (n): ánh nắng
- shade (n): bóng mát
- sheet of plastic (n): tấm nhựa
- condensation (n): sự ngưng tụ
- moisture (n): độ ẩm
- Eggs-shell(n): vỏ trứng
<b>II.Practice:</b>
*Answer keys:
a, A
b, B
c, B
d, B
<i><b>Compost – making process:</b></i>
1. use shovels to turn the compost
2. start a compost heap
3. water the compost
4. place in the garden
5. use as fertilizer
6. keep for six months
+
- Asks Ss to read example and guides
Ss how to do
- Ask Ss to work in pairs(5’)
- Call some pairs of Ss practise
asking and answering before class.
+
- some Ss say again the intructions to
reuse, reduce or recycle sth
+
( Tgives some newwords )
- Guides Ss to read newwords twice
- Guides Ss how to listen and get
information
+
-“ you are going to listen to an expert
talking about the way to make
compost”
-+
Answer:
2- 4 - 1 – 3 – 6 – 5
making process
Check and correct
<b>Homework : (2’)</b>
- Learn by heart newwords
and learn the compost-
making - process
- Prepare Unit 10: Read
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
………
<b>- Week: 22</b>
- Preparing
<b>date:22/1/2012</b>
<i><b>- Period: 65</b></i>
* Aim: - Reading for details about
how things are recycled
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to form the Passive
in the Present Simple.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
- T: asks Ss to write
newwords and talk about
the compost- making -
process
<b> 3.presentation :</b>
Teacher’s and Students’ activities
<b>*Warm – up: ( 5’)</b>
- Ss remember vocab of recycling.
<b>*Pre-reading: (11’)</b>
- T presents
- Checking vocab
- Ss predict : the ways people do
with used things and what people
can make from them
<b>*while-reading: (15’)</b>
- Students read the text then
complete the grid
- Students read again and then
answer the questions
- Students read the text again then
choose a correct case for each of
treatment
<b>*Post-reading: (6’)</b>
- model sentences
<b>* Bingo :</b>
<i>Suggested words</i>
Reduce, reuse, recycle, overpackage,
leather, fabric, compost, fertilizer,
vegetable matter, moisture,
condensation, wrap
<b>* Vocabulary:</b>
- floor coverings (n) tấm trải nền nhà
- refill (v) làm đầy lại
- glassware (n) đồ thủy tinh
- deposit (n) tiền đặt cọc
- dung (n) phân thú vật
* Checking: slap the board
* Open prediction:
e.g - People collect waste paper and then
recycle it to make writing paper
- people collect milk bottles and clean
them and reuse them
<b>Grid :</b>
- Car tires are recycle to make pipes and
floor coverings
- Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled
- Glass is broken up, melted and made
into new glassware
- Drink cans are brought back for
recycling
- Household and garden waste is made
into compost
<b>Questions</b>
<i>a. People cleaned and refilled empty</i>
<i>milk bottles</i>
<i>b. The glass is broken up, melted and</i>
<i>made into new glassware</i>
<i>c. The Oregon government made a new</i>
<i>law that there must be a deposit on all</i>
<i>drink cans. The deposit….</i>
<i>d. Compost is made from household and</i>
<i>garden waste</i>
<i>e. If we have a recycling story to share,</i>
<i>we can…..</i>
- How to change an active sentences
into a passive one
<b>*Home work: (3’)</b>
- Give tasks
<b>Passive form</b>
-Form: Simple Present tense
Active:
Passive:
<b>S + be + V</b>
E.g: Act: We collect waste paper
Pass: Waste paper is collected by us
a.
b.
c.
- Learn by heart
- Prepare well for the next period
………
………
……
<b>**********************************</b>
<b>**********************************</b>
<b>***</b>
<b>- Week: 22</b>
- Preparing
<b>date:04/2/2012</b>
<i><b>- Period: 66</b></i>
* Aim: - To help Ss to write a set of
instruction on how to recycle used things.
* Objective: - Students will be able
to write a set of instructions, using the
sequencing.
* Teaching aids:
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: ( 8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to read the paragraph
and answer the questions, write
vocabularies.
<b> 3.presentation :</b>
<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b>
<b>I. Warm – up: (5’)</b>
- Change into passive voice
- Give feedback
<b>II.Pre-writing ( 10’)</b>
- T introduces the content of the text
about the recycling instructions.
- T asks Ss to read the text and find
newwords
- Guides Ss to read newwords twice
- Check and correct
<b>III, While-writing: ( 12’)</b>
Guide Ss to complete the instruction by
using the verbs in the box and the text
- Ask Ss to work in pairs
- Then call some to give the answer
- Check and correct
- guides Ss how to write instructions on
how to prepare the tea leaves to keep
mosquitoes away.
<b> * Revision:</b>
1 ,4, 5 - lucky numbers
2. People speak English everywhere
3. We do not use things carefully
6. Children like candies
7. Mr Loi teaches math
8. Vegetarians do not eat meat
<b>I. </b>
- tray (n) : cái khay
<b>-II. </b>
1,
instruction
Use the verbs in the box.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
- Asks Ss to look at the picture, use the
words given to write sentences
- Ask Ss to work in pairs.( 5’)
- Call some Ss to say sentence by
sentence
And Some Ss write on the board.
- T corrects mistakes
<b>IV, Post-writing ( 5’)</b>
- T gives suggestions and asks Ss to
write the instructions
Call Ss to do . Check and correct
(7)
2,
prepare the tea leaves.
a, first, take the used tea leaves from
the tea pot.
b, next, scatter the tea leaves on a
tray
c, then, dry the leaves in the sun
d, finally, put the dry leaves in a pot
for future use.
+ break/ glass/ small pieces
+ wash/ the glass
+ melt/the glass/ a liquid
+ use pipe/ blow/ new glassware
<b>V, Homework (3’)</b>
- Learn by heart
newwords
- Rewrite the
instructions on how
to recycle the
paper, tea leaves or
the glass.
- Prepare Unit 10:
<b>Language focus</b>
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
……
**********************************
*****************
<b>- Week: 23</b>
- Preparing date:
<i><b>- Period: 64</b></i>
<b>A, Objectives:</b>
By the end of the lesson, Ss can
use the passive voice of the simple
present, simple future; The structure: to be
+ adj +to-V…
<b>*Contents: - Vocabularies: detergent, </b>
specific, blow, dip, shape, relieved, scarf,
confirm.
<b> - Grammar:- passive form/ Adj </b>
followed by : an infinitive/a noun clause
<b>B, Teaching aids : Book, extra board, </b>
planning lesson.
<b>C, Procedures : </b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
<b>T: asks Ss to write </b>
new words and rewrite
the instructions on
how to recycle the
paper, tea leaves or the
glass.
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>I. Warm-up: (Jumbled words) ( 5’)</b>
- difficult - important
- easy - understand - hard
- believe , dangerous - wait.
* Presentation: ( 17’)
<b>II, Grammar</b>
<b>1/ Passive voice</b>
* Passive forms of the present simple
tense
Ex: They break the glass into small
T: Present the Jumpled words on
Ss: Rewrite the Jumbled words in
the correct ones.
- Give and explain new words
-- asks Ss to make sentences with
pieces
The glass is broken into small
pieces
Active: S + V/Vs/es + O + …
Passive: S(o) + is, am, are +Vp<b>II + …</b>
* Passive forms of the simple future
tense
Ex: They will build a new school
A new school will be built
Active: S + will + V + O + …
Passive: S(o) + will + be + Vp<b>II + …</b>
<b>2/ Adjectives + to – infi</b>
Eg: It’s difficult to get a good jod now
* Adj can be followed by a clause
<b> Adj + That- clause</b>
I am delighted that you passed your
examination
<b>III. Practice: ( 10’)</b>
1.Work with a partner.
Eg: Break the glass into small pieces.
The glass is broken into small pieces.
b, The glass is washed with a detergent
liquid.
c, The glass pieces are dried comletely
d, They are mixed with certain specific
chemicals.
e, The mixture is melted until it
becomes a liquid
f, A long pipe is used. It is dipped into
the liquid.Then the liquid is blown into
intended shapes.
*Put the picture in the correct order.
a, - 1 b, - 4
c, - 3 d, - 5
e, - 2 f, - 6
2, Complete the dialogue.Use the
correct form of the verbs in brackets
(1) wil be shown
(2) will it be built
(3) will be finished
(4) will it be made.
3,Complete the dialogue.Use the words
in the box.
b, easy to understand
c, hard to believe
d, dangerous to go
e, important to wait
each structure
Check and correct
Introduce the adj + to – infi …
And a noun clause
- Give Ss some examples
Ask Ss to give the form
-- Some Ss write on the board
-Asks Ss to put the picture in
correct order
-- Guides Ss how to do exercise
- Gives an example
-- Asks Ss to read the dialogue and
choose the correct adj in the box to
complete the dialogue
-4, Complete the letter.Use the correct
forms of the verb Be and the adj in the
box.
(1) was happy
(2) am relieved
(3) is afraid
(4) are … sure
(5) am certain.
<b>IV,Production: ( 2’)</b>
* Exercise: change these sentences into
the passive
a, People collect the glass for recycling
b,They will build a new house for him
- repeats the main knowledge in
the lesson
- ask Ss to do exercise
<b>V, Homework (1’)</b>
- Learn by heart newword + passive
forms
- Prepare for Unit 11(getting
started+listen and read
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
……
****************************
*********************************
<b>- Week: 23</b>
- Preparing date:
<b>28/1/2011</b>
<i><b>- Period: 65</b></i>
<b>A, Objectives</b>
By the end of the lesson, Ss can read
and understand the content of the
dialogue about traveling in Viet Nam
<b>* Contents:</b>
<b> - Vocabularies: temple of </b>
literature, harbor, crop, corn, sugar can,
take a photo.
<b> - Grammar: Would you </b>
mind + Ving
Would you
mind if + S + V(past)
I can see + O
+ Ving …..
<b>B, Teaching aids : Book, tape, cassette, </b>
picture….
<b>C, Procedures: </b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: ( 8’) </b>
<b>T: asks Ss to learn by heart</b>
newword + passive forms
<b> 3.presentation :</b>
<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b>
<b>* Warm – up: Matching ( 5’)</b>
-Ss look at picture and match the
pictures with their names
- Give feedback
<b>*Presentation: ( 15’)</b>
- T presents vocab
- Checking : Rub out and remember
- Set the scene
- Ss read the dialogue quickly to
answer the pre-questions.
- Students answer the questions
- Student listen to the dialogue then
practice in groups
*Getting started
a.
b.
c.
d.
Front seat(n): ghế trươc
Water buffalo (n) con trâu
Wow ! : ( For exclamation)
Sugar cane (n) cây mía
Crop (n) mùa vụ
A forty – minute drive :
<i>dài 40’</i>
The drive takes 40 minutes
It’s a 40 - minute drive
Take a photo: chụp hình
<b>* Dialogue</b>
<b>* Pre- questions: </b>
a. Who are talking in the conversation?
b. Where are they now?
-><i> Answer :</i>
a. Tim, Hoa, Mr Jones, Mrs Jones,
- T/F sentences
- Model sentences
<b>* Practice: ( 10’)</b>
- Ss use the model sentences and given
cues to make polite requests
- Give feedback
<b>* Production: (3’)</b>
- Ss work in 2 groups , use th cues in
the boxes to make and respond to
polite requests
- Give feedback
<b>*Home work: (2’)</b>
- Give tasks
b. They are at the airport
<b>* T/F statements</b>
-> <i>Key: </i>
a. T b. T c. F-> in a taxi d. T
e. T
f. F-> Not only rice and corn but also
sugar canes are grown around Ha Noi
<b>* Polite request :</b>
-Would/Do you mind if ………? Not at
all
-Would/Do you mind + V-ing ?No
problem
<b>* Word – cue Drill:</b>
- Open the window
- Turn off the T.V
- Open your computer
- Lend me some money
- Turn on the lights
<i><b>Example exchange:</b></i>
Would you mind if I open the
window ?
No, of course not
* Noughts and crosses:
Carry/bag
Close/
door
Make/tea
- Learn by heart newwords
- Prepare well for the next period
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
……
<b>- Week: 23</b>
- Preparing date:
<b>30//2011</b>
<i><b>- Period: 66</b></i>
By the end of the lesson, Ss
can make and respond to polite requests
and suggestions , using “mind” ,Ss will
be able to listen and get informaion from
the tape in order to match the places to the
correct positions on the map.
<b>* Contents:</b>
<b> - Vocabularies: vegetarian </b>
restaurant, revolutionary, zoo and
botanical garden, through. pagoda,
starve, highway, direction, bridge
- Grammar: - Do you mind …..
- Would you mind
….
<b>B, Teaching aids : Book, extra board, </b>
tape, cassette ….
<b>C, Procedures : </b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: ( 2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: ( 8’)</b>
T: Asks Ss to read the dialoge and
answer the questions, write vocabularies.
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: ( 5’) Sentence </b>
<i><b>Transformation</b></i>
<b>EX: Can you close the door?</b>
<b> + Would you mind closing the door.</b>
<b>A, Skeaking:</b>
+ <b> Pre-speaking: (8’)</b>
<b>* Structure:</b>
a, Would you mind open the window?
b, Would you mind if I open the window?
* Requests and responses with “Mind”
+ Would you mind + Ving……
<b> Do</b>
Ex:Do you mind giving me the book?
<b> Would you mind giving me the book?</b>
+ Would you mind if + I + V(past)
<b> Do We V(present)</b>
Ex: Would you mind if I rode your bike?
Do you mind if I ride your bike?
+ Yes, I don’t mind / Please do
Not at all / Please go ahead
+ I’m sorry, I can’t
I’m sorry, that is not possible
<b>* Newwords</b>
<i>-</i> Vegetarian restaurant (n): <i>nhà hàng bán </i>
<i>đồ ăn chay</i>
- Revolutionary (n): <i>Thuộc về cách mạng</i>
<i>-</i> Through (prep): <i>hết , suốt</i>
<i>-</i> Zoo and Botannical garden (n): <i>thảo cầm</i>
<i>viên</i>
* While-speaking (5’)
<i>+ Work with a partner</i>
You: Would you mind if I asked you
a question?
Tourist: Not at all.
You: I want to visit Museum. Could you
suggest one ?
Tourist: Sure. I suggest going to the
Revolutionary Museum.
You: That sounds interesting.
Tourist: Would you mind telling me the
opening hours?
You: It opens from 8 a.m to 4.30 p.m daily,
<b>Tourist: Thank you very much</b>
You: You’re welcome.
* Post-speaking (3’)
+ Exercise: Correct mistakes
a,Would you mind if I use your computer?
b, Would you mind to carry this table?
c, Do you mind if I turned off the light?
<b>*Listen :</b>
<i><b>Match the places in the box to their correct</b></i>
<i><b>positions on the map</b></i>
* Pre-listening<b> . (5’)</b>
+ Newwords:
- pogoda (n): chùa
* While- listening (5’)
Answer keys
a, restaurant
b, hotel
c, bus station
d, pagoda
e, temple
* Exercise : Tick T or F
a, The hotel is on Da Lat Street. (F)
b, The restaurant is in the opposite the
direction from the pagoda (T)
c, The bus station is beside the hotel (F)
d, The old temple and the pagoda are on the
same road (T).
* Post –listening ( 3’)
+ What is place a ?
+ Where is the bus station ?
<b>* Homework (2’)</b>
- Learn by heart newwords
- Write the position of each place on the
map
- Guides Ss to prepare “Read”
<b>Experience: </b>
………
………
………
………
<b>- Preparing date: 13/2/2012 </b>
<i><b>- Period:70</b></i>
<b> </b>
By the end of the lesson, Ss
can read and understand the content of the
text about the famous resorts in VN
<b>* Contents:</b>
<b> - Vocabularies: Oceanic </b>
Institute, giant Buddha, offshore island,
accommodation, Eternal, waterfall, tribal,
mountain slope, jungle stream, heritage
site, magnificent, limestone
- Grammar:
<b>B, Teaching aids : Book, extra board, </b>
planning lesson.
<b>C, Procedures : </b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: - Greeting</b>
<b> - Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
<b>T: Asks Ss to write newwords and </b>
write the position of each place on
the map
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: Chatting (5’)</b>
<i>+ Do you enjoy traveling around Viet </i>
<i>Nam? Can you tell me some famous </i>
<i>places in Viet Nam?</i>
<i>+ Do you know where Ha Long Bay is? </i>
<i>+ What is interesting in Nha Trang/ </i>
<i>SaPa/ Da Lat?</i>
<b>* Pre-reading: ( 10’)</b>
<b> Newwords:</b>
- oceanic institute (n): viện hải dương
học
- giant Buddha (n): phật khổng lồ
- offshore island (n): đảo xa bờ
- eternal (a): vĩnh cửu
- accommodation (n): chỗ ăn ở
- tribal (a): thuộc về bộ lạc
- mountain slope (n): dốc núi
- jungle stream (n): suối rừng hoang
- recognize (v): nhận biết
- heritage (n): di sản
- magnificent cave (n): động lộng lẫy
- limestone (n): đá vôi
<b>* While- reading ( 15’)</b>
1, Check the topics mentioned in the
brochures about the resorts
- caves: Ha Long Bay
- flights to Ha Noi: Nha Trang
- hotels: Da Lat, SaPa, Ha Long
- local transport: all four places
- mini-hotels: Ha Long Bay
- mountain slopes: SaPa
- railway: Nha Trang
- restaurants: no places
- sand beaches: Ha Long Bay
- tourist attractions: all four places
- types of food: no place
- villages: SaPa
- waterfalls: Da Lat
- World Heritage: Ha Long Bay
2. Answer. Where should these people
go?
a, SaPa
b, Nha Trang
c, Nha Rong Harbor
d, Nha Trang
e, Da Lat
- Andrew should go to SaPa because there
<b>* Post – reading ( 3’)</b>
+ Why should Andrew go to Sa Pa?
Mary Nha Trang?
<b>-Homework (2’)</b>
- learn by heart newwords
- Write the beautiful sights in SaPa, Nha
Trang, Da Lat, Ha Long Bay
- Prepare for Writing
-Preparing date: 14/2/2012
- Period: 71
* Aim: - To help Ss practice in
writing a narrative using a guided
compostion..
* Objective: - Ss will be able to
know how to write a narrative.
* Teaching aids:
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: - Greeting</b>
<b> - Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation </b> :
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm-up: *Shark Attack</b>
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (unfortunately)
<b>* Pre- reading:</b>
□ <i>Pre-teach vocab:</i>
<i>- Canoe (n) :</i>
<i>- (to) paddle:</i>
<i>- (to) hire:</i>
<i>- (to) overturn:</i>
<i>- (to) rescue:</i>
<b>* While-reading:</b>
□ Ordering statements.
- Set the scene:
c, a, g, d, f, b, e (Ex. P. 106)
<b>* Pre-writing:</b>
□ <i>Pre-teach:</i> (Matching)
- <i>(to) stumble: vất ngã</i>
<i>- (to) go off: nổ chuông</i>
<i>- (to) realize:nhận ra</i>
<i>- pool of water (n)</i> <i>vũng nước</i>
(pictures on page 106 - 107)
d, b, e, h, a, f, c, g.
<b>* While - writing:</b>
Write a story about
Uyen, using the pictures already rearranged
and the given words.
<i><b>Example exchange :</b></i>
<i>Uyen had a day to remember last week</i>
<i>She had a Math exam on Friday but she got</i>
<i>up late. She realized her alarm clock didn’t go</i>
<i>off. As she was leaving home, it started to rain</i>
<i>heavily. Uyen tried to run as fast as she could.</i>
<i>Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell</i>
<i>onto the road. Her schoolbag went into a pool</i>
<i>of water and everything got wet. Strangely, the</i>
<i>rain stopped as she got to her classroom.</i>
<i>Luckily, she had enough time to finish her</i>
<i>exam.</i>
<b>* Post-writing: </b>
- Comparing - Correction.
<b>* Homework:</b>
- students write a short paragraph about
recently trip.
- Week: 24
-Preparing date: 10/2/2011
- Period: 73
* Aim: - To help Ss practise in
using - ed and - ing participles. Further
practice in making and responding to
requests using "mind".
* Objective: - Ss will be able to use
present and past participles to describe
things and people, make some suggestions
on some tourist sites in VietNam to
foreign tourists.
* Teaching aids:
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER : - Greeting</b>
<b> - Checking</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: T asks Ss to read</b>
the story in last lesson in front of the class
and correct.
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b> <b>T's activties & St’s activities</b>
<b>* Warm-up: (Kim's game)</b>
□ Look at the pictures and write
the names of the things they've
just seen in the pictures.
<i><b>* Language Focus 1:</b></i>
<b></b>
Presentation:
□ Pre-teach:
T: What's Ba doing?
T:Ask questions and call on Ss to
answers correct.
Ss:Open their books and look at the
pictures on p. 108
T: Elicit the target lòch sử by asking the
questions.
Ss:Answers the questions
Ss: He's reading a book.
Or: He's sitting under the tree?
Who is the boy reading a book?
Model setence:
- Concept check:
Form: Verb + ing <sub></sub> Present
participle
Use: A present participle can be
used as an adj to qualify a noun.
<i>* Practice: (Word - Cue - Drill)</i>
1. Mr. Quang/ walk up the
stairs.
2. Miss Lien/ carry a bag.
present participle.
Ss:Repeat the model sentence.
T: Ask Ss to do exercise
Ss:Listen and copy down.
T: Ask the questions
Ss:Run through the situation again
T: Explain the form and use of past
participle phrase
Ss:Look at the words in the box and the
picture on page 109 to do the matching,
T:Ask the questions
Ss:Look at the picture and answer the
questions
Listen and copy down
<b>* Language focus 4:</b>
<i>* Presentation</i>:
□ Revision: (Gap fill)
T: Guide Ss to do exercise.
Ss:Read the text on page 105 and check
(V) the boxes.
T:Monitor and correct.
Ss: - Practise asking and answering the
questions.
T: Tell Ss to ask and answers questions
using the informations the text.
Ss:Use the right words in the box to fill
in the gaps.
- Give feedback.
T:Monitor and correct.
- Put the gap fill chart on the board ask
Ss to do exercise.
- Correct.
<b>* Practice:</b>
□ Ordering pictures.
- turnoff the stereo.
- watch TV while eating.
- sit down.
- postpone the meeting.
- turn on the air-conditioner.
- smoke.
T: Give instructions
Ss:Write the numbers and look at the
pictures on page 110.
- Listen to the situations and order the
pictures
- Give their answers.
T:Correct.
<b>* Production:</b>
Play the roles to demonstrate the
exchanges based on the models
below the pictures.
<b>* Homework:</b>
-Students rewrite the
structures:”Would/Do you mind
If ………
- Monitor.
Ss:Play roles
Period : 74
Date of preparing
<b> </b>
<b>I.The objectives:</b>
- To revise all the knowledge
needed to the test
- To prepare well for the test
<b>II.The teaching aids : </b>
- Text books, lesson plan,...
<b>III. The teaching procedure:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: - Greeting</b>
<b> - Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: T asks Ss to rewrite</b>
the structures:”Would/Do you mind
If…..”
<b> 3.presentation : </b>
<b>Teacher’s & Students’</b>
<b>activities</b>
<b>*Warm – up:</b>
- Ss match each sentence with
its grammatical matter.
<b>*Revision :</b>
<i><b>* Matching :</b></i>
1. I study English in order to communicate
with foreigners.
2. I promise I’ll study harder.
3. Glass is broken into small species.
4. The man walking up stairs is my teacher.
5. The old lamp made in China is 5 dollars.
6. Do you mind helping me ?
<i><b>Grammatical matters :</b></i>
a. Passive form
b. In order to/ so as to
c. Modal
and promises.
d. –ing and –ed participles.
e. Requests with “mind”
<b>I. In order to/ so as to/to + phrase : </b>
The boy reading a book is Ba
(present participe phrase)
Turned off explain telling ask.
1. Would you mind ... me sth about it?
2. Do you mind if I... you a questions?
3. Would you please... this new word to
me?
- T remind Ss of grammatical
structures thet they have learnt.
<b>*Practice:</b>
- Ss do exercises on the question
sheets
*Production:
T: asks Ss to repeat the
structures
Ss: remember and talk in front
of the class.
<b>*Home work:</b>
- Give tasks
<b> so that + clause :</b>
phrase
I lend some money
computer.
clause
<b>II. Modals </b>
<b>and promises :</b>
<b>III. Passive forms :</b>
Active:
<b>S + V + O</b>
Passive:
<b>S + be + V</b>
E.g: Active : We collect waste paper
Passive: Waste paper is collected by us
<b>IV. –ing and –ed participles:</b>
Ex:
The boy reading a book
The box painted red
<b>V. Formal requests:</b>
1. Would/ Do you mind + V-ing………..?
2. Would you mind if + S + V-ed …… ?
3. Do you mind if + S + V ……..?
<i><b>Agreemen</b>t:</i>
No, I don’t mind/ No, of course not / Not at
all/ Please do/ Please go ahead
<i><b>Disagreement:</b></i>
I’m sorry, I can’t/ I’m sorry, it is impossible
I’d prefer you didn’t/ I’d rather you didn’t
<b>Exercises :</b>
- Prepare well for the test
<b>- Preparing date: 19/2/2011 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 77</b></i> <b> </b>
<i><b> </b></i>
<b>Aims: Reading for </b>
details about making
plans for a vacation
abroad.
<b>Objective: By the end </b>
of the lesson, students
will be aware of how
to make, accept and
decline invitations
<b>Teaching aids: Text </b>
book.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b> <b></b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>Warm – up:</b></i>
Match the names of the countries in the box
with appropriate pictures / flags
Chatting:
T: Which country do you want to visit?
T: Why?
S: ………
<i><b>Pre - reading:</b></i>
Pre – teach vocabulary
- (to) include:
- (to) come over:
- (to) pick S.O up:
- abroad (adv) : in a foreign country
- (to) be / go / travel / live abroad
<i><b>T / F Prediction</b></i>
1. Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the
airport in San Francisco
2. Mrs Smith invite Mrs Quyen and her
husband to stay with her while they are in
town
3. Mrs Quyen doesn’t accept Mrs Smith’s
invitation because she wants to say with a
Vietnamese friends of hers
4. Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the
USA for 3 days
5. Mrs Quyen and her husband will come
over to Mrs Smith’s place for dinner one
night
6. Mr Thanh, Mrs Quyen’s husband goes
abroad for a business meeting
<i><b>While - reading:</b></i>
Read the dialogue (p. 112)
Correct the false statements
Complete Mrs Quyen’s schedule
* Complete mrs. Quyen’s schedule :
Schedule Mon 25 Tue 26 Wed
27
Thur 28
Coming
to San
Francisco
Going
out
Having
dinner
with
the
Leaving
San
Francisco
<b>* Listen and read 2 P.113 :</b>
a. No, they won’t because they are coming on a
tour, and their accommodation is included in the
ticket price, so they will stay at the hotel
b. No, he won’t because he will have a business
meeting in the evening that day
c. Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel
<b>* Making invitation :</b>
<i><b>Invitation:Would you like to come and stay with </b></i>
us?
<i><b>Acceptance: Yes, we’d love to/ Thank you. That </b></i>
would be very nice
<i><b>Refusal : That’s very kind of you, but we are </b></i>
coming on a tour/ Sorry, I’m afraid I’m not free
<i><b>Post - reading:</b></i>
- Ss work in pairs, S1 acts as Mrs. Quyen , to make
<i><b>* Homework:</b></i>
- Students learn by heart vocabularies, read the
dialoge
<b> - Preparing date:26/2/2012 </b>
<i><b>- Period: 78</b></i>
<b>Aim: to get Ss to </b>
practice in making
plans using tourist
brochures and flight
information. Listening
for information about
the weather.
<b>Objective: By the end </b>
of the lesson, students
will be able to talk
about their plans for a
trip abroad, Practice in
listening to the
weather forecast for
<b>Teaching aids: Text </b>
book, chart. Cassette,
chat.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b> <b></b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b>
<i>Warm – up:</i> Chain game
T: Yesterday
S1: I
S2: went
T:Ask Ss to say out a word until
they make a meaningful sentence
<i><b>Pre- speaking:</b></i>
<i><b>Pre – tech vocabulary:</b></i>
- (an) itinerary : a plan for a
journey including the route and
the places you visit
- (a) gallery : I go to this place to
see works of arts to be shown
- (a) flight : a journey made by
plane
- via (prep) : through a place
- facilities
- (a) brochure
<i>Matching:</i>
1. Itinerary
2. Flight information
3. Hotel advertisement
4. Travel brochure
<i><b>While speaking</b>:<b> </b></i>
<i>Questions:</i>
For the flight information table
- Which flight can you take
every day of the week?
- Which of the hotel is cheaper?
<i><b>Production:</b></i>
You
- Where shall
we stay
- Where should
we visit?
- What time
should we leave
Los Angeles
Your friends
- The Revere
Hotel is
expensive but it
has a gym
- I think we
should visit
T: Elicit words from students
Ss:Give words in English or
Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read words in chorus
Ss: Listen and repeat
T:Check vocabulary by technique
“Slap the board”
Ss:Match the photocopied tables
with the right titles
T:Show the photocopied tables (p.
113-114) on the right of the board
and ask Ss to match them with the
right titles on the left
Ss:Listen and answer the questions
T:Ask Ss questions for information
about the flight accommodation and
tourist places
Ss: Give the answers
T: Correct the mistakes
Ss: Work in pairs replacing the
information using the tables
T:Model
Monitor and correct
* Pre- listening:
<b>Brainstorm :</b>
cold
T:Write the topic on the board
Ss:Find the words related to the topic
warm
Open – prediction
(gap – fill on page 115)
<i><b>While – listening:</b></i>
Listen to the passage and fill in the
blanks with the information (p.
115)
<i><b>* Open prediction : </b></i>
City Weather Temperature
Low High
1. Sydney dry,
windy
<b>20</b> 26
2. Tokyo <b>dry,</b>
<b>windy</b>
15 <b>22</b>
3.
London
<b>Humid,</b>
cold
<b>-3</b> <b>7</b>
4.
Bangkok
Warm,
<b>dry</b>
<b>24</b> <b>32</b>
5.
NewYork
<b>Windy,</b>
<b>cloudy</b>
<b>8</b> 15
6. Paris <b>cool, dry</b> 10 <b>16</b>
<i><b>Post - listening:</b></i>
Write – it – up : use the
information in the table to write a
weather report
<b> * Production:</b>
- Sts make a plan for their coming
holiday
<b> * Homework:</b>
- Students prepare a weather
forecast on next period.
T: lets Ss predict
Ss:Predicts the information
T:gives instruction
Ss:Listen to the passage and give the
answer
Ss:Write the weather report
T:Correct the mistakes
<b>* Transformation:</b>
<i><b>Example :</b></i>
<i><b>Depart (Hue)………</b></i>
<i><b>Arrive (Ho Chi Minh City)</b></i>
<i><b>………..</b></i>
<i><b>Accommodation………</b></i>
<i><b>Sightseeing………</b></i>
<i><b>.</b></i>
<i><b>Depart (HCM City)…………..</b></i>
<b></b>
<b></b>
<b>---</b>
<i><b> - Preparing date: 29/2/2012 </b></i>
<i><b>- Period: 79 </b></i>
<b>Aim: Reading for </b>
information about the
Words related to the
weather forecast
places of interest in the
world.
<b>Objective: By the end </b>
of the lesson, students
can obtain some
knowledge about some
scenic sports in the
USA
<b>Teaching aids: Text </b>
book.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b> <b></b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>Warm – Up:</b>
<b>* Braintorm :</b>
What do people do when traveling ?
(Ex: take photos, visit places of interest,
eat specialities, go swimming, go fishing,
climb mountain, go camping, go
shopping, buy souvenirs,…
<i>Pre - reading:</i>
Pre – teach vocabulary:
- volcano (n)
- lava (n)
- (to) pour out
- (to) carve
- (to) be situated
<i>While - reading:</i>
Grid
<b>1. Grids and forms :</b>
<b>Places</b> <b>What she did and saw</b>
<b>a. Hawaii</b>
<b>b.NewYork</b>
<b>c. Chicago</b>
<b>d.Mount</b>
<b>Rushmore</b>
<b>e.San</b>
<b>Francisco</b>
Went swimming, visited
Kilawea Volcano
Went shopping, bought a
lot of souvenirs
Saw Lake Michigan
Saw the heads of 4
American Presidents
Visited Fisherman's
wharf, the Napa
Valley-wine growing area and
T: gives Ss to play game
Ss: work in groups.
T:Elicit words from students
Ss:give words in English or
Vietnamese
T:Guide Ss to read in chorus
Ss:Listen and repeat in chorus
T:Check vocabulary by technique
“what and where”
Ss: Copy down the vocabulary
T: Draw the grid on the board
Ss: read the postcards form Mrs
Quyen to her children and fill in
the gaps with the information
taken from them answer
questions
T: calls on some Ss to go to the
board and write the information
Ss: gives feedback
T: Correct the mistakes
the Alcatraz Prison
<b>2. Comprehension questions : </b>
a. She went there by plane
b. She saw the famous prison on the
island of Alcatraz
c. It is the mount where the heads of 4
American Presidents are carved into the
rock; and it can be seen from more than
100 km away
d. It is also called "The windy city"
e. She went shopping
<i>Post – reading:</i>
Answer the questions on p.
upload.123doc.net
<b>*Home work:</b>
- Give tasks
<b></b>
<b></b>
--- Preparing date: 01/3/2012
<i><b>- Period: 80 </b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: To get Ss to </b>
practice in writing a
postcard.
<b>Objective: Ss will be </b>
able to write postcards
to their friends about
their trip
<b>Teaching aids: Chart, </b>
drawing.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: </b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendances</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b>
<i>Warm – up:</i> (Lucky numbers)
<i><b>*Lucky number :</b></i>
2, 5, lucky numbers
1. Where did Mrs Quyen and her husband
spend their holiday ?
3.Who did they visit when they were in the
U.S.A ?
4. What did they see on the Mount
Rushmore ?
6. What did Mrs Quyen buy ?
7. What did she send to her children from
the U.S.A ?
<i>Pre - writing:</i>
Gap – fill
Exercise 1 on page
1. in 2.people 3.weather 4. visited
5. her 6. nice/happy 7. bought
8. for 9. heaviness 10. soon
Grid :
Information needed to write a
postcard
- What do you write about the place?
- ……….. weather?
<i>While – writing:</i>
- Set the scene
- Write the postcard
*Grid :
Place We're having a
wonderful time in the
U.S.A
How do you
feel about the
people ?
The people are very
friendly
Weather The weather has been
warm and sunny
Who you
meet/visit
I visit my friend,
Sandra Smith
What you see (no information)
What you buy I bought a lot of
souvenirs
<i><b>* Writing :</b></i>
<i>Post - writing:</i>
correction
<i>Homework:</i>
Write their postcard in their notebooks
---.
<b>- Week: 27 </b>
-Preparing date: 27/2/2011
<i><b> - Period: 77</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b> </b><b> </b>
<b>Aims: Practice in Past </b>
progressive and
Present progressive
tenses with “always”.
<b>Objectives: Ss will be </b>
able to talk about
activities using the
Present and Past
Progressive tenses
<b>Teaching aids: </b>
Pictures.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b> <b></b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>Warm – up:</b><b> (Kim’s game)</b></i>
Say what the people in the pictures are
doing
1. take a shower 4.write a letter
2. eat dinner 5.walk with a dog
3. read book 6. talk to grandma
<i><b>Presentation 1</b></i>
Set the scene:
Look at picture ! what was Ba doing at
8 o’clock last night?
- Model sentence:
Ba was talking a shower at 8 o’clock last
night
- Form: was/ were + v_ing
- use: to indicate an action that was in
progress at a point of time in the past
<i><b>Practice:</b></i>
1. Ba / take a shower
2. Hoa / have dinner
3. Bao / read a book
4. Nga / write a letter
5. Na / walk with her dog
6. Lan and her grandma / talk to each
other
<i><b>Presentation:</b><b> (language focus 2)</b></i>
Matching
Look at the pictures then match the
half – sentences in column A to
those in column B
Model sentence:
The Le family was sleeping when the
mailman came
Concept check:
- Form: Main clause Con adv clause
S.P When S.past
While P.C
- Use sequence of tenses: An action
was talking place in the past when
another action took place
<b>->Key to LF2:</b>
<i><b>a C b F c E d B e D f </b></i>
<i><b>-A</b></i>
. Production: (picture drill)
<b>Model sentence :</b>
Bao is always forgetting his homework
be adv V-ing
The present progressive tense with“always”
The progressive tenses are used with always
to express a habitual action( usually bad
habit as a complaint)
-> Key :
b. Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella
c. Mr and Mrs Thanh are always missing
the bus
d. Nam is always watching T.V late
f. Na is always talking on the phone
g. Liem is always going out
<i><b>Homework:</b></i>
Write complete sentences in the
notebook(1, 2, 3)
---
--- <i>Preparing date: 05/3/2012 </i>
<i>period 81 </i>
<i> </i>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Reading for </b>
details about
traditional festivals.
<b>Objective: students </b>
will be able to ask for
explanations of events.
book, fosters.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b> <b></b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<i>Warm – up:</i> (chatting)
Tom, David, Huckleberry,…….
T: I likes swimming and sunbathing
Where should he go?...why?
S:……….
<i>Pre - reading:</i>
- (to) yell = to short loudly
- (to) urge : make a person move more
quickly
- (to) rub
- (to) participate
- (to) award
<i><b>Open prediction:</b></i>
<b>Rice – cooking festival</b>
<i>Water fetching rice cooking</i>
<i> Fire making</i>
<i>While – reading:</i>
T / F statements
a. Only one team member take part in
the water. Fetching contest
b. One person has to collect one water
bottle
c. Pieces of bamboo are used to make
the fire
d. In the final contest, the judges taste
the rice
<b>Key:</b>
<i><b>a. F b. F c. T d, F e. F f. T</b></i>
Grammar drill:
(compound adjectives)
a rice - cooking festival
a water – fetching competition
article noun V- ing
Concept check
Use: to form a compound adj
Form: Noun + V_ing
Transformation drill:
a. A fire - making contest
b. A bull – fighting festival
c. A car – making industry
d. A flower – arranging contest
e. A rice – exporting country
f. A clothes – washing machine
<i><b>* Homework:</b></i>
- Students rewrite 3 names of festivals
Period 82
Preparing date : 08/3/2012
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Practice in </b>
talking about
preparations and listen
for details.
<b>Objective: students </b>
will be able to talk
about their
preparations for a
special event
<b>Teaching aids: Text </b>
book, chart.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>Warm – up</b>:<b> Find things in common write</b></i>
5 things often prepare the Tet
<b>* Brainstorm :</b>
- decorate/ clean/ paint the house/ the room-
buy cakes, candies, drink, food, fruits
- Cook special meals/ make cakes/ get/ buy
new dress
- Write/ send postcard to friends, relatives
<i><b>Pre- speaking:</b></i>
Speak 1:
Pre – teach vocabulary:
- Pomegranate: quả lựu
- Peach blossoms : hoa đào
- Marigolds: cúc vạn thọ
- Dried watermelon seeds : hạt dưa
Ordering:
A – F B – G
C – H E – I
D – J
<i><b>While- speaking</b>:<b> (Mapped dialogue)</b></i>
Mrs Quyen
A. You / tidies /
bedroom?
B. Market / have
Lan
1. Yes / where /
to / oranges /
pomegranates
collect / new
Ao Dai tailor /
corner
<i><b>Production</b>:<b> (speak 2)</b></i>
- a village festival
- a school festival
- a harvest festival
……….
<i><b>Pre – listening</b>:<b> </b></i>
- Gap – fill prediction
Read the statements on page 124 and
predict the words in the gaps
<i><b>While – listening :</b></i>
Listen to the dialogue
<i><b> Answer key</b></i>
a. Mr Robinson/ flower market
b. traditional
c. dried watermelon seeds
d. make
Give the answer and check if Ss’
guesses are right or not
<i><b>Post – listening:</b></i>
- Grid: Fill in the gaps with the
information taken from the statements
(p.124 ex2) thing to do
- Mr Robinson: Go to the flower market
to buy peach blossom and a bunch of
marigolds
- Mr Robinson: Go to Mrs Nga’s to learn
how to make spring rolls
- Liz: Go to the market to buy candies
and a packet of dried watermelon
seeds
<i><b>* Homework:</b></i>
- students rewrite things prepare for Tet
<i> </i>
<i> - Period: 83 </i>
- <i>Preparing date: 10/3/2012</i>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Reading for </b>
details about
Christmas.
<b>Objective: Ss will get </b>
some knowledge about
Christmas
<b>Teaching aids: </b>
Pictures , poster.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b> <b><sub>T's activties & St’s activities</sub></b>
<b>*Warm – up:</b>
<b>* Chatting :</b>
1. When is Christmas held every year ?
(December 24th )
2. Do you celebrate Christmas ?
<i><b>Pre - reading:</b></i>
Pre – teach vocab:
- Christmas carol
- Patron saint
- Jolly decorate
Matching:
1. It has been said he was the patron
saint of children, a fat jolly man
who wore a red suit and give
children presents on Christmas
Eve
2. The custom of decorating it and
putting it in a common place,
spread throughout Europe to
America
3. They were stories put to music
and enjoyed by most people. First
the leaders of the church did not
T: Presents new words in the
board
Ss:Give words in English or
Vietnamese
T:Guides Ss to read words in
chorus
- Listen and repeat.
T:Check vocab by technique
“Jumbled words”
- Copy down vocabulary.
T:Stick the pictures
(Christmas / tree / card /
Santa Claus) on the board
- Look at the pictures and
read the statements then do
the matching.
T:Put the statements on the
board
like them but later they became
popular
4. An English man had S.O design it
to send Christmas greetings to his
friends. Now it is a part of the
Christmas tradition
a. Christmas carol
b. Christmas card
c. Santa Claus
d. Christmas tree
<i><b>While - reading</b>:<b> </b></i>
Read the paragraphs on page 124
– 125
Check if Ss’ answers are right or
not
Complete the table (Ex1 p. 126)
<i><b>Post - reading:</b></i>
Answer the questions (ex2 p. 126)
1. More than a century ago
2. He wanted to send Christmas
greetings to his friends
3. 800 years ago
4. An American professor named
Clement Clarke Moore
5. On the description of Saint
Nicholas in professor Moore’s
poem
<b>Home work:</b>
- Let students do the exercises in the
workbook
- Prepare well for the next period
T: Write on the board
- Read the paragraphs and
check their prediction
T:Ask Ss to read the
paragraphs and check their
predictions
- Answer the question.Give
feedback
T:Correct the answers
---
----Preparing date : 13/3/2012
Period 84
<i> </i>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: to get Ss to </b>
practise in writing a
report.
<b>Objective: Ss practice </b>
in writing a report on a
festival they have
joined
<b>Teaching aids: </b>
Photocopied picture
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b> <b></b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: T calls Ss</b>
to write the homework on board and
correct the answer.
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>Warm – up:</b></i>
Brainstorm:
1. How many people are there in
the picture?
2. Name all the things in the
picture
<i><b>Pre – writing:</b></i>
Gap fill
<b>Answer key</b>
<i>1. Rice – cooking 6. traditional</i>
<i>2. one / a 7. bamboo</i>
<i>3. Water – fetching 8. six</i>
<i>4. run 9. separate</i>
<i>5. water 10. added</i>
<b>* Understanding questions </b><i>:</i>
1. What does this report show?
2. Where was it held ?
3. How many competitions were
there ?
4. What do each team do in each
contest ?
5. How was the festival ?
1. Name of the festival
5. How were the ativities organized ?
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture
and ask the questions
Ss: - Look at the picture
T:Guide Ss to do exercise on p.
127
- listen and answer the questions
T: Correct the mistakes
- Use the information in the
dialogue on p. 121 fill in the gaps
in the report on p. 127
6. How many people took part in each
activity ?
7. What did you think about the festival
?
<i><b>While –writing:</b></i>
Questions and answers (ex2 on p. 127)
<i>This report shows how the school</i>
<i>festival was held</i>
<i>The festival was held in the</i>
<i>schoolyard. There were two</i>
<i>competitions: volleyball and jug of war</i>
<i>In the volleyball game, the were six</i>
<i>students in each team and each class</i>
<i>had a volleybal team. The played</i>
<i>against each other and the 9G team</i>
<i>had most points got the grand prize.</i>
<i>There were ten students who took part</i>
<i>in the jug of war</i>
<i>Each class had a team and the 9B team</i>
<i>won all the others got the first prize.</i>
<i>The school festival was wonderful. it</i>
<i>made all the students love their school</i>
<i>and study better.</i>
<i><b>Post – writing:</b></i>
Present the report on a festival on
the board
<b>*Home work:</b>
- Let students do the exercises in the
- Prepare well for the next period
T:Guide Ss to answer the question
on p. 127
Ss:Write a similar report on a
festival by using the answers on
the p. 127
T: Correct the mistakes
**********************************
**********************************
<b> </b>
<i> - Period:</i> 825
- <i>Preparing date: 15/3/2012</i>
<b>Aim: To get Ss to </b>
practise in reporting
what was said and
<b>Objective: Ss will be </b>
able to use reported
speech and the passive
in the past, Present and
future tenses
<b>Teaching aids: </b>
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b> 1.CLASS ODER: - Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b> 2.CHECK UP: T calls Ss </b>
to read the the report on a festival on
the board.
<b> 3.presentation</b> :
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>Warm – up:</b></i>
Infinitive Past participle
Put put
Write written
Hold held
Make made
Break broken
<i>Presentation:</i>
Language focus 1:
Pre – teach : Matching
A
1. Present
simple
2. Past simple
3. Future
simple
4. Present
perfect
B
a.was/were + p.p
b. have/has been +
p.p
c.Is/are/am + p.p
d. Will/shall + p.p
<i><b>Practice:</b><b> Exercise 1 on p. 128</b></i>
Language focus 2:
Presentation: Pre -teach vocab:
- (to) jumble
- (to) scatter
- a jar
1. jumble 2. broken 3. broken
4 scattered 5. pulled
<i>Language focus 4:</i>
Presentation: Pre – teach
Set the scene:
Model sentence: Reported speech
He said he was a plumber
Pay attention to the changes in
1. Tenses
Directed speech
- Present
Will
Must
Reported speech
- Past
Would
Had to
2. Pronouns: depending on the
subject of the main clause
3. Adverb of place and time
Exercise 4 page 130
a. He said he could fix the faucets
b. He said the pipes were broken
c. He said new pipes were very
expensive
d. He said Mrs Thu had to pay him
then
<i><b>* Production:</b></i>
Matching:
<b>Tenses</b> <b>Form</b>
1.Present simple
2. Past simple
3. Future simple
4.Present perfect
a. Was/were + V.pp
b. Have/has been +
c. Is/are/am + V.pp
d.will/shall be + V.pp
<i><b>* Homework: </b></i>
- Students learn by heart some structures in
lesson.
---
<b> - Preparing date: </b>
<b>11/3/2011 </b>
<b>Aim: To get to </b>
practise in reading to
seek information.
seek information about
a language game to
complete a summary
<b>Teaching aids: </b>
Picture, postcards.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b> <b></b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>Warm – up:</b><b> (Matching)</b></i>
Match the names of the famous world
landmarks to the correct
<i><b>*Getting started : Matching</b></i>
a. The Pyramid
b. Sydney Opera House
<i><b>Pre - reading:</b><b> (ordering)</b></i>
1. B asks questions to find out who or
what is
2. A thinks of a famous person or place
3. B wins if he/she can guess the correct
answer
4. A gives B a clue
5. B loves if he/she can not guess the
correct answer
6. A can only answer “Yes” or “No”
<b>*Vocabulary</b>
- Clue (n) Manh mối
- Rule (n) luật chơi
<i><b>While - reading:</b></i>
- Read the dialogue p. 131
->Key: 2 - 4 - 1 - 6 - 3- 5
<i><b>Post – reading:</b><b> </b></i><b>Gap fill </b>
<b>* Gapfill : (Listen and read 2 P.132)</b>
5. American 6. Gold 7. right 8.
was
<i><b>Homework:</b></i>
- Student write “Matching exercise”
a.The great Wall of China
b. The Eiffel Tower
c. The Empire State Building
d. The Golden Gate Bridge
<b> </b>
<i><b> - Period: 87 </b></i>
<b> - Preparing date: </b>
<b>18/3/2012</b>
<b> </b>
<b> </b><b> </b>
<b>Aim: Practise in </b>
asking and answering
<b>Objective: Ss will be </b>
able to make a report
on famous places
using reported speech,
and recognize
mistakes through
listening to an
advertisement.
<b>Teaching aids: Chart, </b>
posters.
<b>Procedures: </b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b> <b></b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>*Warm – up:</b>
<b>* Chatting:</b>
<b>Questions</b> <b>Places</b>
1. Is the Great Wall in
England ?
No/ China
2. Is Stonehenge in
England
Yes
3. Is Phong Nha Cave in
Vietnam
Yes
4. Is Mount Everest in
Nepal ?
Yes
5. Is the Empire State
Building in San Francisco
?
No/ New
Southern VN?
Yes
7. Is Hue Citadel a World
Heritage
Yes
8. Is Big Ben in France ? No/
England
9. Is Great Barrier Reef a
World Heritage ?
Yes
10. Is Eiffel Tower in
Australia ?
No/ France
<i><b>*Pre- stages:</b></i>
<b>I.Vocabulary</b>
- an inn (n) Quán trọ
- a jungle (n) rừng rậm nhiệt đơi
- a rain forest (n) rừng mưa nhiệt đơi
- Crystal clear (adj) trong suốt như pha lê
- Coral sea (n) biển san hô
- Snokel (v) bơi lặn có sử dụng ống thở
<i><b>* Read the advertisement :(Listen P.133)</b></i>
<b>* Reported speech with yes/no </b>
<b>questions</b>
<i><b>Model sentences</b></i>
I said to Lan"Is the Great Wall in England
?"
I asked Lan if/whether the Great Wall is
in England
Teacher asks students 10 yes/no
questions about 10 places
- T presents vocab
- Students read the advertisement
and try to guess the mistakes
- Ss take notes in reported speech
with yes/no questions
- Sts notice the changes
<b>Form: S + asked + (O) if/whether S + V</b>
<i><b>* Notice the changes:</b></i>
say <sub></sub> asked
question <sub></sub> statement
Simple present <sub></sub> simple past
Eg: I asked Tung if/whether Stonehenge
was in England. He said it was
<b>II. Practice :</b>
<b>1. Speaking :</b>
Eg:
Lan : Is Phong Nha Cave in Vietnam?
Hoa: Yes
Ha: Lan asked Hoa if/whether Phong Nha
Cave was in Vietnam. She said it was
<b>2. Listening :</b>
*Key :
Southern -> Far North
Inn -> Hotel
Jungle-> rainforest
<b>*Production:</b>
<b> Reporting :</b>
Eg: Tung asked Hien if/whether Big Ben
was in France. She said it wasn't. It was in
England
<b>*Home work:</b>
- Do the exercises 3, 4 in the workbook
- Prepare well for the next period
them (groups of three)
- Students listen to the tape then
check their predictions
- Students listen again then give
their answers
- Students write the reported
speech in their notebooks
- Give tasks
<b> - Preparing date: </b>
<b>20/3/2012</b>
<b>Aim: read for details </b>
about the wonders of
the world.
<b>Objective: Ss will be </b>
able to get some
knowledge about the
wonders of the world
<b>Teaching aids: </b>
Pictures.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: - </b>
<b>Greeting</b>
<b> - </b>
<b>Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP:</b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b> <b><sub>T's activties & St’s activities</sub></b>
- Wonder, attraction, famous,
quiet, century
<i><b>Pre - reading:</b></i>
<i>Pre – teach vocab</i>:
- to compile:
- to claim :
- to honor :
- a god:
- religion (n)
- royal (n)
Checking technique:
Slap the board.
<i><b>T / F prediction</b></i>
1. An Egyptian man compiled a list of
what he thought were the seven
wonders of the world.
2. The only surviving wonder is the
Pyramid of Cheeps in Egypt
3. Today, we can still see the
Hanging Gardens of Babylon in
present – day Iraq
4. Angkor Wat was originally built to
honor in Hindu God
5. The Great Wall if China first
wasn’t in the list of the 7 wonders of
the world
6. In the early 15th<sub> century, the </sub>
Khoner King chose Angkor Wat as
the new capital
<i><b>While – reading:</b></i>
Read the text on p. 134, to
check their guesses
Correct the false statements
Multiple choice (ex on p. 134)
Answer key:
a. The only surviving wonder on
Antipater’s list is the Pyramid of
Cheops
b. Angkor Wat was originally built
for Hindus
T: Elicit words from students
T:Guide Ss to read word in
chorus
Ss:Listen and repeat in chorus
T:Check Ss’ memory by
technique “Slap the board”
- copy down
T:Put the chart on the board
Ss: read the statements and
predict if which statement is
true, which one is false
T:Ask Ss to decide if the
statements or true or false
- Read the text and check their
prediction
T: write Ss’ guesses on the
board
- Correct the false statements
T: Ask Ss to read the text on p.
134 and check their prediction
- Choose the best answer to
complete the sentences
T:Ask Ss to do exercise on p.
- give feedback
T:Listen and give the correct
answers
c. Angkor Wat was part of a royal
Khmer city a long time ago
d. In the 1400s, the Khmer King
chose Phnom Penh as the new capital
<i><b>Post – reading:</b></i>
Grid:
Wonders of the
world
Countr
y
1. Hanging Gardens
of babylon
2. ………..
Iraq
* Homework:
- Sts summarize paragraph in your
mind
T:Present the grid on the board
and ask Ss to fill in
---
<b> - Preparing date: </b>
<b>22/3/2012</b>
<b> </b>
<b>Aim: Practice in </b>
writing a letter to a
friend.
<b>Objective: Ss can </b>
write a letter to a
friend about a place
pictures.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: - Greeting</b>
<b>-</b> <b> Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>Warm – up:</b><b> guessing place </b></i>
<b>*Brainstorm</b>
How to describe a place
- Name
- Weather
- Sights
- Accommodation
- How to go there
<i><b>Pre - writing:</b></i>
Pre – teach vocab:
- ranger: a person qho takes care of a park
- edge
- canyon
- breathtaking : very exciting
- temperate
- stone Age
Checking technique: Rub out and
remember
Insertion:
Read the letter and then to complete it by
inserting the letters of the missing sentences
<b>* Matching: (Write 1. P.135)</b>
1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A
<i><b>While - writing:</b></i>
Write a letter to a friend, using the
prompts on p. 135
<b>Outline</b>
- Place:( Ha Long Bay, Cuc Phuong
- Distance: ( about 100km, 12 hours by
train…)
- Sights: (beautiful, breathtaking…)
- Weather: (temperate, sunny, cool…)
- How do you feel (happy, relaxed…)
E.g :
(date, month)
<i>Dear……, </i>
<i>How are you ? I hope you and your family</i>
<i>still has a good health and you will have a</i>
<i>good result for your exam.</i>
<i>My family has just return from a trip to Ha</i>
<i>Long Bay. It is a world heritage site. We</i>
<i>spent 5 days there and I didn’t want to leave.</i>
<i>There are many beautiful limestone islands</i>
<i>and magnificent caves. </i>
<i>That’s all I have time to tell you about. What</i>
<i>do you plan to do during the summer</i>
<i>vaccation ? Write to me.</i>
<i><b>Post - writing:</b></i>
- Correction
<i><b>Homework:</b></i>
- Students write a letter to your friends tell
about recently trip.
---
<i><b> - Period: 87 </b></i>
<b> - Preparing date: </b>
<b>20/3/2011</b>
<b> </b><b> </b><b> </b>
<b>Aim: Further practice </b>
in reported speech and
the passive.
<b>Objective: Ss can </b>
report what people say
Charts, posters.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ODER: - Greeting</b>
<b>-</b> <b> Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation </b> :
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>Warm – up:</b><b> (Bingo)</b></i>
Temperate, breathtaking, royal,
religious, canyon, pyramid, edge,
god, jungle, compile
<i><b>Language focus 1</b>:<b> </b></i>
<i><b>Presentation:</b></i>
The passive in the past simple :
Was / were + p.p
Practice:
Do exercise 1 on p. 136
- Answer key:
a. was completed d. was presented
b. was constructed e. was
reached
c. was designed
<i><b>Language focus 2:</b></i>
Presentation:
Ex: Do you know My son, Nga?
- Nhi asked Nga if / whether she knew
My son
Practice:
- Oral Drill
Production:
- Writing Drill: MS was in
a. Nhi asked Nga QN province
b. ……….. it was far from
HN
c. ……….
<i><b>Language focus 3:</b></i>
T: Remind the form of the passive
in the Past simple tense
Ss:Resay the form of the Passive in
the Past simple tense
T:Ask Ss to do exercise 1 on p.136
- Choose the verbs in the box for the
gaps in the sentences
T: set the scene to introduce the
model sentence
- Complete the sentences with the
right passive form of the verbs
T:Give instruction
- report what Nhi asked Nga
T:Correct and ask Ss to write the
right answer in their notebooks
- One student reads the question,
another student reads the reported
sentence
T: Show the word Cue chart on the
board
- write the reported sentence on the
board
T:Model the first sentence and ask
Ss to listen
Word Cue Drill
a. tell / go / there / how
- Nga told Nhi how to go there
S V Qw to-inf
b. Nga showed Nhi where to get
tickets
c. Nga pointed out where to buy
souvenirs
d. Nga told Nhi what to do there
during the visit
<b>*Production</b>
* Transformation :
1. He said to me “Do you learn
English ?”
He asked me...
2. She did the test perfectly
The test...
<i><b>* Homework:</b></i>
- Students learn by heart some
structures
T:Check if Ss recognize the model
sentence
- Do exercise,
Give feedback
T:Correct and have Ss copy
- T: gives Ss exercise
- Ss do transformation exercise
**********************************
**********************************
**
- <i>Week: 31 </i>
- <i>Preparing </i>
<i>date:22/3/2011 </i>
<i> - Period: 89 </i>
<b> </b><b> </b>
I. Fill in the blanks with suitable
words: (2ms)
The Rice –
cookingFestival
This report shows how the (1)
festival was held. The festival was
held in the communal house yard
about one kilometer away from a
river. There were three competitions
(2), fire – making and rice – cooking.
The festival took one day. In the
water – fetching contest one person
from each team had to (3) to the river
to get the (4).
In the fire – making contest two
team members had to make a five in
the traditional way. They tried to rub
pieces of (5) together to make the
fire.
(6) people from each team took part
in the rice – cooking contest. They
had to (7) the rice from the husk and
then cook the rice.
After the three contest, all the point
were (8) and the Thon Trieu group
won the grand prize. The festival was
wonderful.
II. Choose the best option A, B, C or
D to complete the following
sentences: (4ms)
1. Tom loves …….. soccer
A. plays B. played C.
playing D. play
2. The…….. are friendly here
A. weather B. food C.
sights D. people
3. It was a …….. contest
A. cooking rice B. rice cooking
C. rice cook D. ricing cooked
4. He asked me if I ………. Play
tennis
A. can B. could C.
may D. must
5. The girl ……. Next to me is a
new comer
A. sitting B. sit C.
sat D. sits
6. Vietnam …….. many gold
modals at Sea Games 22nd
A. win B. won C.
was wining D. to win
7. Most of the mobile phone ……..
in this shop are imported from
China
A. selling B. sold
C. are sold D. were sold
8. Many people want ……….. the
A. to see B. saw C.
see D. seeing
III. Change these sentences into
reported speech: (2ms)
1. Mary said “I come to school by
bus”
2. Tom says “I can do this exercise”
3. The man said to Mrs Thu “You
must pay me now”
4. Nhi asked Nga: “Is My son in
Quang Nam province?”
IV. Change the sentences from the
active into the passive: (2ms)
1. Miss Lien wrote the letter
2. Ba drew the picture
3. Mr Nhan is repairing the
computer
4. Hoa turns off the light
The end.
******************************
******************************
*************
<i>- Period: 90 </i>
<i>- Preparing date:</i>
<b>25/3/2012</b>
<i> </i>
<b> </b><b> </b>
<b>Aim: to get Ss to </b>
differentiate facts from
opinions through
reading.
<b>Objective: Ss will be </b>
able to express their
opinion about a
problem
<b>Teaching aids: </b>
Photocopied picture.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ORDER:</b> <b>- Greeting</b>
<b>-</b> <b> Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation </b> :
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>Warm – up:</b><b> ( Brainstorming ) </b></i>
<b>Getting started</b>
Computer can help us :
<i>- Save time</i>
<i><b>Pre –reading:</b></i>
Pre – teach vocab:
- Printer (n) :
- manual: a book coming with a
machine tells you how to use the
machine
- connect (v) :
- under guarantee
- plug (n&v) :
1. The painter isn’t working
2. Nam has already turned the
computer on
3. Nam knows how to connect a
printer but he hasn’t connected
it properly
4. the manual helped them to find
out the problem
5. Mr Nhat bought the computer
in HCM City and it’s still
under guarantee
6. Mr Nhat think the (computer)
company wouldn’t do
anything with his computer
because it’s too far from his
place
T: write the topic on the board
Ss:Think of the topic and express
their opinions
T:Elicit words from students
Ss:Say words in English or in
Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read words in chorus
Ss:Listen and repeat in chorus
T:Check Ss’ memory by using
technique “what and where”
Ss:Read and write the words in the
right circles
T:Present the statements on the
board
- Read the statements and predict
which are true, and which are false
T:Ask Ss to read the statements and
guess which statements are true and
which are false
- give their answers
<i><b>While - reading:</b></i>
Reading the dialogue on p. 138
and check if their guesses are
right or not
Key: 1 2 3 4 5 6
Fact: a thing that is known to be
true, especially when it can be
proved
Opinion: Your feelings or
thoughts about someone or
something, rather than a fact
Fact or opinion:
a. The printer isn’t working
b. There shouldn’t be anything
wrong with it
c. I know how to connect a
painter
d. The manual isn’t very helpful
e. I bought it in HCM City
f. I don’t know what they can do
<i><b>Key: a. F b. O c. O </b></i>
d. F e. F f. O
<i><b>* Homework:</b></i>
- Students learn by heart the dialoge
T:write Ss’ guesses on the board
- Read the dialogue on p. 138 and
check if their guesses are right or
not
T:Ask Ss to open their books and
read the dialogue on p.138
- Give feedback
- Copy the corrected sentences
T: Correct the false sentences
- read the dialogue again and decide
which are fact or which are opinion
T: Explain the words “Fact and
Opinion”
Ss: listen and do
T:Asks Ss to do exercise 2 on p.139
<i>- Period: 91 </i> <b> </b>
<i>- Preparing date:</i>
<b>27/3/2012</b>
<b> </b> <b> </b>
<b>Aim: to get Ss to </b>
practice in expressing
agreement and
disagreement
<b>Objective: Ss will be </b>
able to use some
common useful
expressions to express
agreement and
disagreement.
<b>Teaching aids: </b>
Photocopied.
<b>Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ORDER:</b> <b>- Greeting</b>
<b> </b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation </b>:<b> </b>
Content
<i><b>Warm up:</b></i>
* Matching :
I like
I don't like
I think
I don't believe
Neither do I
You are right
So do I
I agree
<i><b>Pre- speaking</b><b> </b>::</i>
Brainstorm:
Present the table on p. 140
Matching:
1. reading comic books
2. playing in the rain
3. driving a car
4. Foreign food
<i><b>While- speaking</b>:<b> (picture Drill)</b></i>
<b>* Describe the picture:</b>
a. Learning to driving a car is
challenging
b. Reading a comic book...
c. walking in the rain...
d. I don't like foreign food...
<i><b>Ex: </b></i>
T: gives Ss to play game
Ss match
T: Elicit expressions to express
agreement and disagreement
Ss:Look at the table and listen to their
teacher’s explanation
T:Guide Ss to do exercise
Ss:Match the words with the pictures
on p. 139
T:Ask Ss to express their opinions by
using the adjectives in the box
Ss: Express their opinions, using the
adjectives in the box
T: Present the dialogue and guide Ss
to practise
- Practise speaking with their partners
T:Monitor and assist Ss if necessary
S1: I think learning to drive a car is
difficult
S2: I agree with you and I think it's
also interesting
<i><b>Production:</b></i>
Practice the dialogue on p. 140 and
then make similar dialogues about
these items, using the information
in the table in exercise 1
* Pre-listening:
□ <i>Pre-teach:</i>
--> starting/ stopping point
(circle)
--> Questions
(triangle)
--> Answers
(oval)
<i><b>* While-listening.</b></i>
□ Listen and fill the gaps.
<i><b>* Post-listening:</b></i>
<b></b><i>Answer key:</i>
a) Do you heve
the correct b)
Yes
change
d) Take
it
<i><b>* Homework:</b></i>
- students summarize main idea of the
lesson
- Practise the dialogue on p.140 and
then make similar dialogue
T:Put the flow chart on the board and
have Ss copy it into their exercise
books.
- Copy the flow chart.
T: Get Ss to understand how events
are requenced in a flow chart and the
meanings the shapes used in the
chart.
Ss: Look at the flow chart and guess
the words in the gaps.
T:Play the tape and ask Ss to listen.
Ss:Fill the gaps with the information
they have hears from the tape.
T:Give feedback and correct.
Ss: Compare the answers with their
partners.
- Go to the board to write their
answers.
<i>- Period: 92 </i> <b> </b>
<i>- Preparing date:</i>
<b>30/3/2012</b>
<b> * Aim: - Reading</b>
comprehension.
* Objective: - Ss can know
more about how computers work in a
university.
* Teaching aids: - Chart,
cardboards.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: - Greeting</b>
<b>-</b> <b> Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm-up: (Jumbled words)</b>
1. Terpirn = printer.
2. Seumo =mouse.
□ Dre-teach vocabulary:
- (a) freshman = the first-year student at
a college.
- (a) Jack (translation).
- (a) bulletin board = notice board.
- Skeptical (a) : translation.
- Impact (translation).
□ Checking technique: What and where.
□ Open - Prediction:
1. Where in the library do we get
information?
2. How can we store the information?
3. If we want to discuss something, how
T:Present Jumbled words on the
board.
Ss:Each team goes to the board to
write their answers as fast as
possible.
T:Divide the class into 2 teams.
Ss:Say words in Enhlish or in
VNese.
T:Elicit words from students.
- Listen and repeat.
T:Guide Ss to read words in
chorus.
Ss:Fill in the circles with the right
words.
T:Check ss'memory by technique
"what and where".
Ss:Listen to the questions and give
their prediction
T:Introduce the topic of the test
and ask ss to guess what they're
Find a
machine
can we do? going to read.
Ss:Read the text and check their
guesses.
T:Give feedback.
<b>* While-reading:</b>
□ True/ False Statements:
( Read on page 141 -142)
<b></b> Answer key:
a) T.
b) T.
c) T.
d) F: Students don't have to go to
computer rooms. Because college
campuses now have computer jacks in
every part of the university.
e) T.
f) T.
<b>* Post-reading:</b>
□ Comprehension Questions:
( Read 2 on page 142)
<b></b> Answer key:
a) If has no library. All the information
normally found in a library is now store
in the university's computers.
b) All the information normally found in
a library or messages normally found on
a bulletin board.
c) A computer and a telephone.
d) With a bulletin board on the Internet,
a great number of people can get access
to the bulletin and exchange information
quickly.
e) (student's answers).
T:Get Ss to read the text again
then read the true/ false statements
or true or false.
Ss:Read and decide which
statements is true or false.
T: Ask Ss to do exercise 2 on page
142.
Ss: Read the questions on page
142 and find the information in the
- Give their answers for the class.
Give their answers and correct the
false statements.
T: Give feedback and correct.
<b>* Homework:</b>
Write the answers in your notebooks.
<i>- Period: 93 </i> <b> </b>
<i>- Preparing date:</i>
<b>04/4/2012</b>
<b> </b>
<b>* Aim: - To get Ss to practice in writing </b>
instructions - Listening for details.
<b> * Objective:</b> - Ss will be able
to write a set of instructions on how to use
the printer and complete a flow chart.
<b> * Teaching aids: - picture (p.</b>
142, 143) charts.
<b> * Procedures:</b>
<b>1.CLASS ORDER:</b> <b>- Greeting</b>
<b> </b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
<b>3.presentation</b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm-up: (Bingo)</b>
- Monitor, power, mouse, screen,
keyboard, printer,...
<b>* Presentation - reading:</b>
□ Dre-teach vocab:
1. Paper input tray
2. Power button picture
3. Icon.
4. Output path.
5. (To) remove: to put (sth) away.
□ Checking technique: Matching.
Exercise 1 on page 142.
<b></b> Answer key:
a) 3.
b) 1.
c) 6.
d) 2.
e) 4.
f) 5.
T:Call out each word in a loud
voice.
Ss:Write 5 words relating to a
computer in their notebooks.
T:Use the picture on page 142 to
elicit words from students.
Ss:Listen to the teacher If anyone
has the same words, they cross it
out. The first student crossing out
tất cả 5 words shout "Bingo" and
win the game.
T:Guide Ss to read words in chorus.
- Listen and repeat.
- Copy down.
T: Ask Ss to look at exercise 1 on
page 142 and do the matching.
- Match the words with the
mumbers in the picture.
T:Get some Ss to give their answers
□ Gap-fill.
1. To wait... (so/ sth).
2. To remove... (sth).
3. To turn... (a machine)
4. To plug... (sth)
5. Load...(sth).
and correct.
- Fill the gaps with the right words.
T:Put the words on the board.
Ss: Give their answers.
T:Correct the mistakes.
<b>* While-writing:</b>
□ Write the instructions on how to use
the printer (Exercise 2 p. 143).
<b></b> Answer key:
- Remove the old paper and load the
new paper in the paper input tray.
- Wait for the power button to flash.
- Have the pages appear on the
computer screen.
- Click the printer icon on the screen and
wait for a few seconds.
<b>* Post-writing:</b>
- Students do exercise:
1. Choose the amount of money you
want to withdraw.
2. Enter the PIN ( Person Identification
Number).
3. Insert the card into the machine.
4. Get money aand the receipt.
+ Answer: 3- 2-1- 4
<i><b>* Homework:</b></i>
- Students perform the way print a
paragraph.
T: Monitor.
Ss:Work in pairs to outline the
instructions using the pictures and
the cues on the page 143
T: Call on some Ss to say out the
instructions in their notebooks.
- Read their writing before the class.
T: Ask ss to write the instructions in
their notebooks.
Ss:do exercise
T: Give feedback and correct.
T: gives students exrecise on the
board
<i>- Period: 94 </i> <b> </b>
<i>- Preparing date:</i>
<b>07/4/2012</b>
* Aim: - Futher practice in using the
present perfect. Futher practice in
comparision of the present perfect and
past simple.
* Objective:- Ss can be use
present perfect to express complete and in
complete actions and recognine the
difference between the present perfect and
past simple.
- Ss can be use "Yet"
and "already" to express the present
perfect.
<b> * Teaching aids: - Chart.</b>
<b> * Procedure:</b>
<b> 1.CLASS ODER: (1’) - Greeting</b>
<b> - Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (5’) - T calls Ss to</b>
perform how to print the paragraph
<b>3.presentation </b>
<b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm-up: (5’) (lucky numbers)</b>
( Consolidation of tenses)
Questions:
1. What does your mother do?
2. What did you do last night?
3. Lucky number.
4. How often is Hue Festival held?
5. Lucky number.
6. What were you doing at 8 c'clock last
ninght?
7. Guess what your parents are doing at the
moment?
8. Who often cooks in your family?
9. Which grade will you be in next school
year?
10. Lucky number.
<i><b>Language focus 1: (10’)</b></i>
* Presentation.
□ Set the scens.
" Ba's mother wanted him to do some
housework while she was at the market. Ba
made noets in his diary."
□ Questions:
T- Has Ba done his homework yet?
S- Yes, he has already done his homework.
T- Has Ba tidied the room yet?
S- No, he has't tidied the room yet.
<b></b> Concept check: Present perfect with Yet
and Already.
<b></b> Use: Yet: used in questions and negative
statements.
<i><b> Already: used in opsitve statements.</b></i>
* Practice:
□ Gap-fill dialogue (exercise 1 p.144).
<b>* </b>
<b> Language Focus 2 (p.144). (7’)</b>
T- Has the flight to Vientiane departed yet?
S- Yes, it has already departed.
T-Has the flight from Los-Angeles arrived
yet?
S- No, it hasn't arrived yet.
T: Show the chart on the board.
Ss:Look at the chart and answer
the questions
T: Asks questions and clicit the
answers from Ss.
- Listen and copy down.
T: Have Ss repeat and write the
sentences on the board.
Ss:Look at Ba's diary and
complete the dialogue using Yet
and Already.
T: Explain the form and the
usage of the present perfect.
Ss: Demonstrate the dialogue for
the class.
T: Let Ss do exercise 1 on page
144.
Ss:Look at the flinght
information and answer the
questions.
T: Give feedback and correct.
Ss:Take in turns to ask and
answer the questions.
T: Ask Ss to look at the flight
information tables and ask
questions to show the models.
SS:Demonstrade the exchanges
in front of the class.
T: Monitor, give feedback and
correct.
<i><b>Language Focus 3. (7’)</b></i>
□ Pre-teach:
<b></b> Set the scene:
1. I've ever been to Dalat <sub></sub> finished.
2. My parents have gone to Dalat for 3 days
(incomplete).
- Concept check: present perfect tence.
<b></b> Use:
- Finished action <sub></sub> indefinite time.
- Incomplete action <sub></sub> for, since, recently.
<b></b> Form: have/ has + past participle.
<i><b>* Practice:</b></i>
<b></b> Do excercise 3 on page 146.
Answer key
Finished
action
Incomplete
action
a)
b)
□ Revision.
1. Her family moved to Hanoi 2 years ago.
2. He has never met such an intelligent boy
before.
3. My brother has become more
independent since he left home.
4. When did the second world war break
out?
Answer key:
1+4: Past simple <sub></sub> finished action with
2+3: Present perfect <sub></sub> an action taking place
from the past to the present.
<i><b>* Practice: (Grammar Drill)</b></i>
Do homework v
Tidy the room x
<b></b> Do exercise 4 on page 146.
<b></b> Answer key:
see (1) Have you seen....
Did you see...
I saw...
not have (2) We haven't had...
be (3) My parents have been...
hear (4) Have you heard the news....
happen (5) What happened?
have (6) He had an accident.
fall (7) He suddenly fell.
break (8) and broke.
arrive (9) Have the plame arrives yet?
Yes, it has.
When did it arrive?
Some structures in lesson
<i><b>* Homework: (1’)</b></i>
Write the questions and answers into your
exercise books.
T: Ask Ss to do exercise 4 on
page 146.
SS: Give their
answer.Demonstrate the
dialogues for the class.
T: Give feedback and correct.
T: Pronunciation correction.
T: asks Ss to repeat the
structures in front of the class.
Ss: listen and talk in front of the
class.
<i>- Period:</i> 96
<i>- Preparing date:</i> 09/4/2012
* Aim: - Reading for details about
development of paper and how to produce
chocolate.
* Objective: - Ss can know the
origin of paper and talk about the process
of producing something.
* Teaching aids: - pictures (p.147,
148), gird chart.
* Procedure:
<b>1.CLASS ORDER:</b> <b>(2’)</b> <b></b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b> - Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP:( 8’) T calls Ss to</b>
<b>3.presentation </b> :
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>* Warm-up: (5’) Quiz - who did it?</b></i>
" Who invented...?"
1. Light bulb <sub></sub>Humphry Davy, an
English scientist, in 1800.
2. Sewing machine <sub></sub> Isaac Meritt
Singer.
3. Telephone <sub></sub> A.Graham Bell.
<i><b>* Pre-reading. ( 10’)</b></i>
□ Getting started:
- Where are they from? (picture a, b, c,
e).
T: Divide the class into 2 teams.
Tell ss the teams raising their hands
first willhave the right to answer the
questions.
- Answer the questions
- What is the man in picture a) doing?
- What is it? (d)
□ Answer key:
A. b)
B. c)
C. e)
D. a)
E. d)
□ Listen and read 1, 2.
- To remove
- To crush
- To liquify
-To grind - ground - ground.
- To manufacture = toproduce
- A process <sub></sub> manufacturing process
- A mold
- Conveyor belt.
□ Set the scene: Jim - Jones is visiting
a chocolate factory with his class and
his teacher.
<i><b>* While-reading: (15’)</b></i>
<b></b> Matching (Exercise 2 on page 149).
a) E
b) D
c) C
d) F
e) B
f) A
<i><b>* Post reading. (3’)</b></i>
<i><b>Answer key:</b></i>
1. The beans are washed, weighed and
cooked.
2. The shells are removed.
3. The beans are crushed and liqnified
4. Cocoa butter, sugar, vanilla and
milk are added.
5. The mixture is ground, rolled, and
pound into the molds.
<i><b>* Homework: (2’)</b></i>
they understand thepictures.
- Look at the pictures and answer
T: Ask Ss to do the matching on
page 147.
Ss: Read the sentences (A
match them with the correct
pictures.
- Give their answers.
T: Give feedback and correct.
T: Elicit words from Ss.
- Say words in English or in VNese.
T: Guide Ss to read words in
chorus.
SS: Listen and repeat.
- Copy down.
T: Check vocb by technique "Slap
the board".
- Slap theright word on the board.
T: Set the scene to introduce
thedialogue.
- Read thedialogue and match the
half sentences.
T: Ask Ss to do exercise 2 on page
149.
- Compare their answers for the
class.
T: Give feedback and correct.
- Copy the grid.
T: Put the grid on the board.
- Read the dialogue
again and fill in the grid. Go to
theboar and write their answers.
T: Give feedback and correct.
- Students learn by heart the
chocolate-manufacturing process.
<i>-- Period:</i> 97
<i>- Preparing date:</i> 12/4/2011
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Futher practice in
using the passive.
* Objective: - Ss can talk
about the inventions the passive.
* Teaching aids: - tables.
<b> * Procedure:</b>
<b> 1. CLASS ODER: (2’) </b>
<b>-Greeting</b>
<b> </b>
<b>-Checking attendance</b>
<b> 2. CHECK UP: (8’) – T calls Ss</b>
to repeat inventions in last lesson
<b> 3. presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>* Warm-up: (5’) (Bingo)</b></i>
Foreman, process, manufacture,
remove, crush, liquify, grind, pour,
mold, conveyorbelt.
<i><b>* Speak 1, 2:</b></i>
<i><b>* Pre- speaking: (5’)</b></i>
<b></b> Pre-teach vocab:
<i>- Facsimile: máy fax</i>
<i>- Reiuforced concrete: bê tông cốt thép</i>
<i>- Microphone: micrơ</i>
<i>- X-ray: máy x-quang</i>
<i>- Loundspeaker: loa phóng thanh</i>
T:Get Ss to brainsrorm a list of 10
words and write them on the board.
Ss:Choose any 4 words and copy
them into their paper.
T: Call out the words until someone
has ticked all of the words and
shouts "bingo".
Ss:Study the meaning of the
invetions.
T: Have Ss study the meanings of
<b>chocolate Manufacturing</b>
<b>Process</b>
<i>- Helicopter: máy bay trực thăng</i>
<i>- Optical fiber: sợi quang</i>
<i>- Laser: la de</i>
<b> Grammar Awareness</b>
Read the dialogue again and pick out of
the passive sentences:
1. This is where the cocoa beans are
stored.
2. That button cannot be touched.
3. Thebeans are washed, weighed and
cooked here.
4. After the shells are removed... into
molds.
* While- speaking: (10’)
<b></b> Word-cue Drill
<b></b> Ask and answer questions to fill in
the missing information in the tables on
page 150 and 156.
T.What was invented by Friedrich
Koenig?
S. Printing Press.
T. When was it invinted?
S. In 1810.
S. Where was Koenig from?
T. He was from Germany.
<i><b>* Post- speaking (3’)</b></i>
<b></b> Making reports.
Eg: The printing Press was invented by
Friedrich Koenig in 1810.
<i><b>* Pre-listening: (Listen 1, 2) (2’)</b></i>
□ Pre-teach vocab:
<i>- Microwave (n:)lò vi sóng</i>
<i>- Pulp: bột giấy</i>
<i>- toaster: máy nướng bánh</i>
<i>- vacuum: máy hút bụi</i>
<i>- hairdryer: máy sấy tóc</i>
<i>- Dishwasher: máy rửa chén</i>
<i><b>* While-listening. (5’)</b></i>
<b></b> Listen 1 (page 150)
<b></b> Answer key:
1. Simple
2. Same
the inventions using Vietnamese.
Ss: Read the dialogue on page 148
again and pick out all of the passive
sentences.
T: Give instructions.
Ss: Give their answers.
T: Review the passive in the present
and past simple tenses.
Ss:Read the model dialogue on page
149
T: Give instructions.
Ss: Ask and answer questions about
the inventions to fill in the missing
information.
T: Monitor and help Ss if necessary
- Give feedback
T: Call on some pairs to
demonstrate the exchenges.
Ss:Complete the table, Use the
complete table to report what they
have found.
T: Correct the mistakes.
- Model and have Ss repeat.
T: Elicit words from ss.
- Say words in English or VNese
- Listen and repeat.Copy down.
T: Guide Ss to read in chorus.Have
ss copy
- Check vocab by technique "What
and where".
T: Inform the topic paper-marking
process.
3. Two hundred
4. Left
5 Rollers
<i><b>* Post-listening: (3’)</b></i>
<b></b> Ordering Prediction
(Listen 2 p.150)
<b></b> Answer key:
c) Paper pulp was placed in the vat.
d) Paper pulp was mixed with water.
a) The water was drained.
e) The pulp fibers were poured out.
g) The pulp was cinveyed under the
rollers.
f) The fibers were smoothed and pressed
dry
b) The paper was put on a roll
<i><b>* Homework: (2’)</b></i>
- Students report the informations about
invention in lesson.
- Read the sentences (listen 1 p.150)
T: Play the tape and ask Ss to fill in
the gaps with the words they catch.
- Listen and fill in the gaps.
- Compare their answers with their
partners.Give their answers.
T: Give feedback and correct
T: Ask Ss to read the senteces (a
and guess the order.
- Read and predict theorder of the
sentences in the part listen 2 on
page 150.
T: Write the Ss' predictions on the
board,Play the tape again. Call on
Ss to give their correction
Ss: Listen and check their
prediction.
T: Correct the mistakes.
**********************************
**********************************
**
<i>- Period:</i> 98
<i>- Preparing date:</i> 14/4/2012
<b> * Aim: - reading for information</b>
about papermaking and inventions.
* Objective: - Ss can fill in the
gaps and order sentences <sub></sub> from listening.
* Teaching aids: - pictures (p.150)
* Procedure:
<b> 1. CLASS ORDER: ( 2’)</b>
<b>- Greeting</b>
<b>- Checking attendance</b>
<b> 2. CHECK UP:</b> (8’) – T
calls Ss to report inventions in last lesson
<b> 3. presentation</b> :
<b>Content</b>
* Warm up: (5’) <i>(Brainstorm)</i>
<i><b>* Pre-reading:</b></i>
□ Pre-teachvocabulary:
<i>- Microwave (n): vi sóng</i>
□ Checking technique "Bingo"
<i><b>* While-reading: (15’)</b></i>
□ Matching ( Read 1 p.151, 152)
<b></b> Questions:
+ What's the 1ST<sub> verse about?</sub>
+ Is the 2nd<sub> verse about the appliances</sub>
used in the kitchen?
+ What are "Doom, chugga-chug,
T: gives Ss to play game
Ss: play game
T: Elicit words from Ss and write
them on the board.
- Say words in English or VNese.
T: Guide Ss to read words in chorus.
Ss:Listen and repeat.
- Copy down.
T: Check vocab by technique
"Bingo".
T: Get Ss to read the poem.
- Read the poem on page 151.
T: Ask some questions to help ss
understand the reading more.
- Listen and answer the questions.
T: Ask ss to do exercise 1 on page
152.
vroom, boom?"
<b></b> Match the headings to the verse on
page 152.
<b></b> Answer key:
+ Verse 1: b. Appliances that cook food.
+ Verse 2: c. Appliances that clean and
dry things.
+ Verse 3: a. Instrucment invented by
Alexander Graham Bell.
□ Gap-fill (read 2)
□ Answer key:
1. Vacuum 4. Microwave.
2. Telephone 5. Hair dryer
3. Washingmachine 6. Toaster.
<i><b>*Production: (3’)</b></i>
* Discussion:
What are the household appliances
mentioned in the poems used for ?
Eg: A microwave is used to cook or heat
food
<i><b>*Homework: (2’)</b></i>
- Students rewrite inventions in lesson
- Match the headings to the verses.
Give their answers.
T: Give feedback and correct.
Ss:Read the sentences and fill in the
gaps with the inventions taken from
the poems.
T: Asks Ss to do exercise 2 on page
152.
Ss:Compare their answers with their
partners.
T: Call on Ss to give their answere
and correct.
****************************
**********************
<i>- Period:</i> 99
<i></i>
<i>-Preparing date:</i> 17/4/2012
* Aim: - Futher
practice in using the
sequence markers.
microwave
telephone
* Objective: - Ss can
use the sequence markers to
describe a manufacuring
procedure.
* Teaching aids:
-pictures (p.153)
* Procedure:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’) - Greeting</b>
<b> - Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’) – T calls Ss to</b>
perform some inventions in last lesson
<b>3.presentation</b> :<b> </b>
<b>Content</b> <b>T's activties & St’s activities</b>
<i><b>* Warm-up: ( 5’)(Jumbled words)</b></i>
1. Lppu = pulp
2. Ureor = roller
3. Morever = remove
4. Darniver = drain
5. Berifver = fibre.
Write 1:
<i><b>* Pre-writing: (15’)</b></i>
<i>- A log = a thick piece of wood that is</i>
<i>cut from a tree ( gỗ khúc)</i>
<i>- To flatten: to make sth become flat</i>
<i>( làm bằng phẳng)</i>
<i>- To refine :</i>
<i>- Chips: lát mỏng</i>
<i>-Chemically: treated in a chemical </i>
<i>process.</i>
□ Checking technique:
Rub out and remember.
□ Gap-fill (Write 1 p.152)
+ What is cut into chips?
+ What are chips mixed with before
they are crushed to heavy pulp?
+ Why is the pulp passed through
rollers?
+ What is the last step in
paper-making?
□ Answer key:
T: Present the Jumbled words on the
board.
Ss: Read and reurite the right words.
T: Inform the topic.
T: Elicit words from Ss.
Ss: Give words in English or in
VNese.
-Listen and repeat.
- Copy down.
T: Guide Ss to read words in chorns.
- Check vocab by technique "Rub out
and remember".
T: Ask ss to do exercise "write 1" on
page 152.
- Read the text on page 152 and fill in
the gaps with the right sequence
makers to descrbe the procedure of
paper making.
T: Ask some questions to check if
they understand the text.
- Read the completed sentences.
1. First 4. After this.
2. Then 5. Then
3.Next 6. Finally.
<i> <b>Write 2:</b></i>
□ <i>Ordering pictures:</i>
1d. The fruit harvest is fermented for 3
to 9 days to kill the beans and turn
them brown.
2a. The beans are dried in the sun.
3e. The beans are cleared in special
machines.
4c. Thebeans are roasted to bring out
the chocolate flavor.
5b. They are shelled and ground to
produce chocolate liquor.
6f. The liquor is made into chocolate
candy or cocoa pouder.
<b></b> Answer key: 6- 2- 4- 1- 5- 3.
<i><b>* While-writing: (10’)</b></i>
<b></b> Use the sequence makers in
exercise "write 1" to link the sentences
together in a paragraph.
<b></b> Answer key:
1d, 2a, 3e, 4c, 5b, 6f.
<i><b>* Post-writing: (4’)</b>(Language Focus</i>
<i>4)</i>
□ Word cue Drill (exercise 4 on page
155)
□ Answer key:
<i><b>Firt, the rice crop is harvested. Then</b></i>
the rice plants are threshed. Next, the
rice grains are husked in the mill to
produce brown rice. After this, the
bran is removed in the mortar and it is
<i><b>finally winnowed toproduce white</b></i>
rice.
<i><b>* Homework: (1’)</b></i>
- Students learn by heart the paper and
T: Gives instruction.
- Look at the picture on page 153.
T: Ask Ss to put the pictures that
describe how cacao beans are
processed in the correct order.
- Think of the process of
chocolate-making and put the pictures in the
correct order. Read the statements
aloud.
T: Give feedback and correct.
T: Gives instructions.
- Rearrange the sentences on page
153 according to the ordered pictures.
T: Call on Ss to give their answer.
- Link the sentences together in a
paragraph.
T: Have Ss use the sequence markers
to link the sentences together in a
paragraph.
- Read their writing for the class.
T: Give feedback and correct.
T: Give instructions.
Ss: Use the pictures and the word
cues on page 155 to write a
description of how white rice is
produced in the traditional way, using
the sequence markers..
T: Monitor while Ss are writing and
help if necessary.
chocolate manufactoring process.
**********************************
**********************************
***
<i>- Period:</i> 100
<i></i>
<i>-Preparing date:</i> 20/4/2012
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Futher practice in using
passive form, sequence markers.
* Objective: - Ss can do exercise :
* Teaching aids: - pictures (p.153)
* Procedure:
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b><i><b>( 2’) - Greeting</b></i>
<b> - Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’) T calls Ss to</b>
perform how to make paper and chocolate
<b>3.presentation :</b>
<b>Content</b>
<i><b>* Warm up (5’)</b></i>
- students play game:” Pelmanism”
Ex: 1. take a. met
2. give b. taken
3 .meet c. given
4. bought d. buy
5………. e. ……
<i><b>* Presentation: (10’)</b></i>
<i><b>* Reviewing the passive form:</b></i>
- the main idea of passive form
- Now you do exercise 1 page( 154) change
the sentences into passive.
- some students write their answer on the
board.
<b>* Answer key:</b>
a/ The document was typed by Mrs.Quyen
b/ The computer was repaired by mr. Nhan
c/ The picture was drawn by Hoa
d/ The lights was turned off by Hoa
e/ The cake was baked by Lan.
- when you change the sentences from the
active into passive, if subject is noun that
person, we must keep and change that
subject into object in passive sentense.
- <i>Now you do <b>exercise 2</b>. Work in pairs and</i>
<i>decide whether the sentences are active or </i>
<i>passive. Use the correct form of the verbs </i>
<i>in brackerts to complete these sentences.</i>
<b>* vocabulary:</b>
<i>Run a business: quản lý</i>
<i>Around the corner: rất gần</i>
<i>Com.Ltd: C.ty trách nhiệm hữu hạn</i>
<i>Due to: bởi vì( = because of)</i>
- some pairs read the answer in front of
class.
* Answer key:
a/ Was awarded b/won
c/ Ran d/ was run/ was sold
e/ was closed
<i><b>* Language focus 3: (10’)</b></i>
+ The zipper, maize → What
+ In the 16th<sub> century, in 1984 →When</sub>
+ By Lewis Waterman → Who
+ In Hungary → Where
+ In coping machine → Which
- some students read the asnwer
<i><b>* Answer key:</b></i>
a/ What was invented by W.L.Judson in
1893.
b/ What was brought into VietNam by
Phung Khac Khoan? When was maize
brought into VietNam?
c/ Where was the ballpoint pen invented?
d/ In which machine is xerography widely
used?
<i><b>* New words:</b></i>
<i>- Ballpoint pen: but bi</i>
<i>- Xerography: kỹ thuật sao chụp không </i>
<i>dùng mực ướt</i>
<i><b>*Production: (3’)</b></i>
Repeat the structures in lesson
<i><b>* Homework: (2’)</b></i>
- students learn by heart the structures
<i>Week:<b>35</b></i>
<i> Period: <b>101</b></i>
<i> - Preparing date:</i>
<i>22/4/2011</i>
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Reviewing some
structures importantly
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to form the Passive
in the Present Simple.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b> <b>T's activties & St’s activities</b>
<b>* Warm-up: ( 5’)(Junbled words)</b>
- difficult - important
- easy - understand - hard
- believe, dangerous - wait.
<b>* Presentation: (15’)</b>
<b>Model sentence: Passive voice</b>
□ Concept checking:
+ Form: Passive Form in the
Present Simple
<i><b> Subject + is/ am/ are + p.p</b></i>
+ Use: it is used when the subject is
affected by the action of the verb.
+ How to change an active sentence
to a passive one V
<b>Active:</b> S
O
Passive: <i><b>S be + p.p by O</b></i>
□ Language focus
T: presents the game
Ss: Rewrite the Jumbled words
in the correct ones.
T: Elicit the model sentences
from students.
- Explain and show how to
change an active sentence to a
passive one.
- Give instruction
- Correction
<b>* practice: ( 10’)</b>
<i>1. The nurse told me to wait</i>
<i>2. The cars hit the dog</i>
<i>3. My mother will prepare the food.</i>
* Request: Câu ỵêu cầu:
<b>Do you mind + V. ing …..?</b>
<b>Do you mind if ……?</b>
<b>Would you mind + V .ing …..?</b>
<b>Would you mind if + S + V2/ed</b>
+ Chúng ta dùng would you mind
<i><b>if…./ Do you mind if … khi muốn</b></i>
xin phép ai làm gì.
T:asks student to do exercise
SS: listen and write to do
T: correct
T: explains
- write
- listen and write
T: asks
- write to do
<b>Car tires are recycled</b> <b>to make</b>
<b>pipes </b>
<b>and</b>
<b>floor </b>
<b>caerings</b>
<b>Glass</b> <b>is</b> <b>recycled</b> <b>into new</b>
<b>S</b> <b>be</b> <b>p.p</b> <b>glasswar</b>
+Chúng ta dùng Would you mind+
<i><b>V.ing hay Do you mind + V.ing</b></i>
khi muốn nhờ ai làm điều gì cho
mình.a
* Practice:
1. May I turn on the TV?
→Do you ………..
2. Please don’t play your music so
loudly.
→Would you mind………..
3. Would you mind not using the
office phone?
→ I’d ………..
<i><b>*Production: (3’)</b></i>
Repeat the structures in lesson
T: corrects
T: asks Ss to repeat the
structures
SS: answer in front of the class.
<i><b>* Homework: (2’)</b></i>
- students learn by heart the
structures.
<i>Week:<b>36</b></i>
<i>-</i> <i> Teaching</i>
<i>date:</i>
<i> Period: <b>102</b></i>
<i>-</i> <i> Preparing date:</i>
<i>05/5/2011</i>
<b> </b>
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Reviewing some
structures importantly
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to form the Past
continuous tense, Reported speech, To
infinitive
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER: (2’)</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: (8’)</b>
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b> <b>T's activties & St’s activities</b>
<i><b>* Warm up (5’)</b></i>
- Playing Rub out and remember
+ sleeping, make, had, went,
bought…………
T: presents the game
- listen and pracstice
<i><b>* Past continuous tense: QKTD (10’)</b></i>
<b>Form: S + Were/was + V.ing</b>
<b>Ex: I was watching TV at seven</b>
<b>o’clock last night. </b>
<b>+ Using:</b>
* Một hành động đang diễn ra trong
quá khứ thì một hành động quá khứ
khác xãy đến, thường được nối vơi
nhau bằng liên từ When.
Ex: I was washing my hair When the
phone rang yesterday.
* Hai hay nhiều hành động xãy ra song
song trong quá khứ, thường được nối
vơi nhau bằng liên từ Why
Ex: My father was watching TV While
my mother was cooking dinner.
<b>* Practice 5’ </b>
1. Nguyen ( wait)……… for me
outside the theater when I (come)……
2. At 4:00 o’clock yesterday morning,
we(drink)…….. coffee and ( listen)
….. to music at the coffee shop.
<i><b>* Reported speech (10’)</b></i>
Ex: He said, “ <i>I want to watch TV</i>”
He said he wanted to watch TV
<i><b>+ Practice:</b></i>
1. Nguyen said, “ I can’t cook”
2. Van said, “ I have two brothers”
3. Nam said, “ I’m thirsty”
4. Hong said, “ I am a student”
* Compound noun: (5’)
- noun + gerund = compound noun
Ex: rice + cooking = rice cooking
<b>* Direct question:</b>
Ex: He said: “ What are you doing?
He asked Nga what she was doing
* Reported Yes/ No question:
<i><b>S +asked +O + if/whether +S+ V..</b></i>
Ex: He said to me, “ Are you hungry”
- He asked me if/whether I was
<i><b>hungry</b></i>
* Question words before to
<i><b>infinitive(5’)</b></i>
<i><b> </b><b>Clause + W/H + to infitive</b></i>
Ex: What to do = What I am to do
* Những động từ theo sau là động từ
nguyên mẫu có To
<i><b>To infinitive theo sau các động từ tiêu</b></i>
biểu như: begin, become, fail, get,
<b>seem, decide, intend, promise, try,</b>
<b>want, need, wish, appear, ask, beg,</b>
<b>wait, agree, dare, tend, plan, offer,</b>
<b>need, would like,……….</b>
<b>Ex: I want to earn my own living</b>
<i><b>*Production: (3’)</b></i>
Repeat the structures in lesson
<i><b>* Homework (2’)</b></i>
<b>- students learn by heart the structures.</b>
T: asks Ss to repeat the structures
SS: answer in front of the class.
**********************************
******
<i>Week:<b>36</b></i>
<i> Period: <b>103</b></i>
<i> - Preparing date:</i>
<i>10/5/2011</i>
<b>DINH AN HIGH SCHOOL </b>
<b>THE SECOND SEMESTER </b>
<b>EXAMINATION Phách </b>
<b>Full </b>
<b>name: ... </b>
………
<b>School year: 2008 - 2009</b>
<b>Class: 8 / ... </b>
<b>ENGLISH 8 Time allowed: 45 minutes</b>
<b>Điểm</b> <b>Giám thị:………..</b>
<b>Giám khảo:……….</b>
<b>I. LISTENING: Listen to the passage</b>
<b>and fill in the blanks with one suitable</b>
<b>word (2.5 pts)</b>
English villages are not all alike,
but in some ways they are not very (1)
………. from each other.
Almost every (2)…………..has a church ,
the round or square tower of which can
be seen for many miles around.
<b>II. READING : Read the passage and</b>
<b>write True (T) False (F): (2.5 pts)</b>
To stay healthy, we should have a
balanced diet , do morning exercises and
have good medical care. However, people
get more diseases because they live in the
polluted environment. So to protecet the
environment from pollution,first we
should reduce smoke from the factories.
Second, we can make our environment
clean by collecting garbage, planting tree.
Finaly, we should make our ocean clean.
1/ ………We have to protect the
environment.
2/……….We shouldn’t plant the tree.
3/………..We should reduce smoke
from the factories.
4/………..We shouldn’t make the
ocean clean.
5/………..We have to do morning
exercises.
III. LANGUAGE FOCUS
1. Have you ______ any news about Lan
since her bike accident?
A. hear B. hearing C.
to hear D. heard
2. We ______ dinner when my friends
arrived yesterday evening.
A. are having B. is having
C. were having D. was having
3. The glass bottle will be broken ______
small pieces.
A. into B. to C.
in D. by
4. They don’t want ______ to the market
now.
A. go B. to go C.
going D. went
5. I ______ home for school at 7 o’clock
every morning.
A. start B. leave C.
go D. move
<b>PHÁCH</b>
<b> </b>
<b>Học sinh không viết vào khung này</b>
6. The girl enjoys ______ her fitness
exercise after classes.
A. doing B. to do C.
do D. did
7. I have known her _______ two years.
A. for B. since C.
with D. within
8. I’d like you ______ with me for some
days.
A. staying B. to stay C.
stayed D. will stay
9. Used paper is collected and _______ to
factories.
A. sent B. sending C.
send D. to send
10. He said he ……… a tourist
A. were B. was C. are
<b>IV. WRITING: </b>
<b>Write a report on a festival you joined </b>
<b>recently. Use the following suggestions. </b>
<b>(2.5 pts)</b>
name of the festival
time and the place where it
was held
activities you saw or took part
in
number of people joining in
each activity
feeling about the festival
<b>- THE END </b>
<b>---đề kiểm tra hk II - Môn tiếng anh 8 </b>
<b>NĂM HỌC: 2008 - 2009</b>
1. Ma trËn
<b>Chủ đề</b>
<b>NhËn biÕt</b> <b>Th«ng hiĨu</b>
TN TL TN
I. Listening
II. Reading 5
III. Language
focus
10
2,5
IV. Writing
<b>Tổng</b> <b>10</b>
<b>2,5</b>
<b>10</b>
<i><b>2. Đáp án và hớng dẫn chÊm:</b></i>
<b>I. LISTENING</b>
<b> Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi câu điền từ</b>
<b>đúng đợc 0,5 điểm.</b>
<i><b>Tapescript:</b></i>
English villages are not all alike,
but in some ways they are not very
<i><b>different from each other. Almost every</b></i>
<i><b>village has a church, the round or square</b></i>
tower of which can be seen for many
miles around. Surrounding the church is
the church yard, where people are burried.
Country life is now fairly comfortable
and many villages have water brought
through pipes into each house
<i><b>II READING</b></i>
<b>Tổng số 2.5 điểm. Mỗi câu đúng đợc</b>
<b>0,5 điểm.</b>
1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F
5. T
<b>III. LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>
<b>Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi từ chọn đúng</b>
<b>đợc 0,25 điểm.</b>
1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. B
6. A 7. A 8. B 9. A 10. B
<b>IV. WRITING</b>
<b>Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Tùy ý viết của HS. </b>
<b>Mỗi ý viết đúng đợc 0,5 điểm.</b>
Yêu cầu phải viết đủ và bám sát các gợi
ý, viết đúng chính tả và đúng ngữ
pháp.
<b>- THE END </b>
<i>---Week:<b>37</b></i>
<i> Period: <b>104</b></i>
<i> - Preparing date:</i>
<i>15/5/2011</i>
<b> </b>
<b> </b>
* Aim: - Reviewing some
structures importantly
* Objective: - By the end of the
lesson, Ss will be able to form the Present
perfect and Sequence.
* Teaching aids: - Textbook.
* Procedures:
<b>1.CLASS ODER:</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
<b>Checking</b>
<b>attendance</b>
<b>2.CHECK UP: </b>
3.presentation :
<b>Content</b> <b>T's activties & St’s activities</b>
<i><b>* Warm up:</b></i>
<i><b>- students play game: “ slap the</b></i>
board” Complete
Complete Construct
Design
Present
reach
* Present perfect with Yet and
<b>already.</b>
T: presents the game
- listen and pracstice
<b>S + Have/has + already +</b>
<b>V3/ed</b>
<b>Ex: We have already writen our</b>
report.
* Yet:
<b>S + have/has + not + V3/ed +</b>
<b>yet</b>
Ex: We haven’t had dinner yet
<i><b>* Sequence markers:</b></i>
<b>First, then, next, after this,</b>
<b>finally</b>
<b>Ex: </b><i><b>First you + Verb….. Then</b></i>
you + verb …….
<i><b>* The passive with place phrase</b></i>
+ Cụm từ chỉ thời gian và nơi
chốn thường là: On và At
<i><b>*Production:</b></i>
Repeat the structures in lesson
<i><b>* Homework: </b></i>
- Students learn by heart the
structures